Chevrolet 1998 Camaro Owner's Manual

Chevrolet 1998 Camaro Owner's Manual
I Supplement to the 1998 Chevrolet
Camaro
Owner’s
Manual
This informationis in addition to the “Removing the Spare Ere and Tools” located in Section 5 on page 28 and
“Storing a Flat or Spare Tire andTools” portion located in Section 5 on page 37 in your owner’s manual.
Removing the Spare Tire andTools
On convertible models, you must also remove the trunk
access panel. It’s at the upper backof the t r u n k . Turn the
two screw knobs under the trunk edge a quarter turn
counterclockwise to remove the panel.
Part No. 98CAM002
I
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Replace thejack, wheel wrench and flat tire usingthe
storage instructions.When you replace the trim panel,
be sure to tuck it under the weatherstrip.
1. Trim Panel
2. Bolt
3. Cover
4. Jack
5. Wing, Nut
6. Adapter
7. Compact Spare Tire
8. Full-Size Tire
9. Carpet Flap
10. Tire Storage Bolt
11. Trunk Access Panel (Convertible Only)
12. Knob
2
NOTE: For Convertible only, remove trunk access
panel by turning two knobs before removing spare tire.
For Coupe model, be sure trim panel is positioned under
weather stripping.
NOTICE:
Tire must fit in molded area to avoid damaging
glass when closing hatch/trunk.
3
NOTES
4
Supplement to the1998 Chevy Camaro and Pontiac Firebird Owner’s Manuals
This is a correction to the ‘%lorsepower” information listed under “Capacities and Specifications” in therear
“Quick Guide” pages of the owner’s manual.
Camaro only:
Horsepower
V6 200 @ 5200 rpm
V8 305 @ 5200 rpm
V8-SS 320 @ 5200 rpm
Firebird only:
Horsepower
V6 200 @ 5200 rpm
V8 305 @ 5200 rpm
V8-WS6 320 @ 5200 rpm
~
Part Number 98CAM/FIR001
1
I
I Tr
theclock, press ana nola 1
and hold MN until the correct minuw
'Io set
PS and
0 The 1998 Chevrolet Camaro Owner’s Manual
1-1
Seats and Restraint Systems
This section tells youhow to use your seats and safety belts properly. It also explains the
air bag system.
2-1
Features and Controls
This section explains how to start and operate your vehicle.
3-1
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
This section tells you how to adjust the ventilation
and comfort controls and how to operate your audio system.
4-1
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find helpful information and tips about the road and how to drive under different conditions.
5-1
Problems on the Road
This section tells what to do if
you have a problem while driving, such as a flat or
tire
overheated engine, etc.
6-1
Service and Appearance Care
Here the manual tells you how to keep your vehicle running properly and looking good.
7-1
Maintenance Schedule
This section tells you when to perform vehicle maintenance and what
fluids and lubricants to use.
8-1
Customer Assistance Information
This section tells you how to contact Chevrolet
for assistance and how to get service and owner publications.
It also gives you information on “Reporting Safety Defects” on 8page
10.
9-1
Index
Here’s an alphabetical listingof almost every subjectin this manual. You can use it to quickly find
something you want to read.
i
We support voluntary
technician certification.
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem and the
name CAMARO are registered trademarks of
General Motors Corporation.
WE SUPPORT
VOLUNTARY TECHNICIAN
CERTIFICATION THROUGH
National Institute for
AUTOMOTIVE
SERVICE
EXCELLENCE
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed.We reserve the right to make changes in the
For
product after that time without further notice.
vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name
For Canadian OwnersWho Prefer a
“General Motorsof Canada Limited” for Chevrolet
Motor Division whenever it appears in this manual.
French Language Manual:
so it will be
Please keep this manual in your vehicle,
Aux propriktaires canadiens:Vous pouvez vous
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road.you
If
en frangais chez
procurer un exemplaire de ce guide
sell the vehicle, please leave this manualit in
so the new
votre concessionaireou au:
owner can useit.
DGN Marketing Services Ltd.
1500 Bonhill Rd.
Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1C7
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10284871 A First Edition
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 1997
All Rights Reserved
The Heritageof Chevrolet
U
The dynamic William C. “Billy”
Durant shifed gears frommaking
carriages to making cars,
forming halfthe team that gave
birth to Chevrole;
1
I
W
._I,
Louis Chevrolet, the other halfof the team,
at the wheel of his experimental “Classic
Six, which entered production in I912.
That year 2999 vehicles were produced.
”
p
"
"
"
"
"
~
~
"
"
~
~ 'I
'
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
The Chevroletblend of
"
~
~
created for the pleasure of the
~
~
~
~
~
'
into each vehicle. It's not
surprising that for 80 years
value and performance open
has
road.
become an American
-
Every decade, Chevrolet
tradition -- whether bredfor
has reinforced its heritage
the racetrack like the legendary
of affordable performance
"Genuine Chevrolet" has been
America's automobile.
We're proud to continue that
&-*.6
Corvette and Camaro, or
with quality and value crafted
,
.~r ! r .
heritage in your Chevrolet,
'
..
& : t i::
e$
In 1932 Chevrolet
introduced the
Synchro-Mesh
transmission and
ofSered a host of
accessories -- including
such niceties as a clock!
The legacy of America Sfavorite sportscar
began in 1953, when 319 hand-assembled
white Corvettes
launched
the
first use of a
fiberglass body in
a production cal:
-- '
iv
I
I
I
I
I
I
' ' ''''' '1
The 1957 Chevy started a romance with the American
public -- and was poweredby an available fuel-injectedV8.
I
I
I
I
I
60 S automotive excitement
included Chevrolet landmarks
like the Corvette Sting Ray,
the sporty Camaro, and
powerplants like the
legendary 327 V8.
I
_ _
Your new Chevrolet continues a tradition of quality and value.
V
How to Use this Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual
from beginning
to end when they first receive their new vehicle.
If you
do this, it will help you learn about the features and
controls for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find
that pictures and words work together to explain
things quickly.
These mean thereis something thatcould hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area,we tell you what the hazardis. Then
we tell you what todo to help avoidor reduce the
hazard.
Please read these cautions.
If you don’t,you or
A good place to lookfor what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s in others could be hurt.
the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
You will also find a circle
with a slash throughit in
Safety Warningsand Symbols
this book. This safety
You will find a numberof safety cautions in this book.
symbol means “Don’t,’’
We use abox and the wordCAUTION to tell you
“Don’t do this’’ or “Don’t
about things that could hurt
you if you were to ignore
let this happen.”
the warning.
Index
vi
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you willfind these notices:
I NOTICE:
These mean thereis something that could
damage your vehicle.
I
In the noticearea, we tell you about something that
can damage your vehicle. Manytimes, this damage
would not be covered by your warranty, and
it could
be costly. But the notice will tell you what
to do to help
avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals,you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
vii
Vehicle Symbols
These are some of the symbols you may find onyour vehicle.
For example,
these symbols
are used on an
original battery:
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
PROTECT
EYES BY
SHIELDING
A
Q
CAUSTIC
BAllERY
ACID COULD
CAUSE
BURNS
These symbols
are important
for you and
your passengers
whenever your
vehicle is
driven:
UNLOCK
IziI
These symbols
have to do with
your lamps:
TURN
SIGNALS
HAZARD
WARNING
FLASHER
viii
COOLANT
TEMP
e
BAllERY
CHARGING
SYSTEM
pf
A
WINDSHIELD
DEFROSTER
WINDOW
DEFOGGER
ENGINE OIL
PRESSURE
,11,
FOG LAMPS
$0
VENTILATING
FAN
-1-1
Here are some
other symbols
you may see:
FUSE
I
LIGHTER
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKES
rl
(0)
)cr
a
Ez
B
HORN
BRAKE
COOLANT
AVOID
SPARKS OR
FLAMES
SPARK OR
FLAME
COULD
EXPLODE
BATTERY
These symbols
are used on
warning and
indicator lights:
WINDSHIELD
WIPER
PAMNpZ
FASTEN
SEAT
BELTS
These symbols
are on some of
your controls:
SPEAKER
e,
FUEL
(@)
Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Here you’llfind information about the seats in your Chevrolet and how to use your safety belts properly.You can also
learn about some things you should not do with air bags and safety belts.
1-2
1-6
1-11
1-12
1- 12
1-19
1-20
1-20
Seats and Controls
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
Here are Questions Many People Ask About
Safety Belts-- and the Answers
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Driver Position
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Air Bag System
1-26
1-30
1-33
1-43
1-46
1-46
1-46
Rear Seat Passengers
Children
Child Restraints
Larger Children
Safety BeltExtender
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Replacing Restraint System Parts After
a Crash
1-1
Seats and Seat Controls
This section tells you about the seats -- how to adjust
them, and also about recliningfront seatbacks, seatback
latches and the foldingrear seatback.
Manual FrontSeat
I
I
A CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seatwhile the vehicle is
moving. The sudden movement could startle and
confuse you, or makeyou push a pedal whenyou
don’t want to. Adjust the driver’s seat
only when
the vehicle is not moving.
1-2
Move thelever under the passenger’sfront seat to
unlock it.
Slide the seat to where you wantit. Then release the
lever and try to move theseat with your body to make
sure the seat is lockedinto place. Be sure the lever
returns to its original position after moving the seat.
4-Way Manual Seat
&Way Power Seat (If Equipped)
There are two levers at the front of the driver’s seat. The
left lever adjusts the seat forward and rearward.The
right lever adjusts the angle of the front of the seat.
The driver’s seat has three controls on theleft side.
To adjust the seats forward and rearward, liftthe lever
under the left front of the seat. Slide the seat to where
you want it. Then release the lever and tryto move the
seat with your body to make sure the seat is locked
into place.
To raise or lower the front of the seat, lift the right lever
and lean forward or backward.
A: The front control makes thefront of the seat go up
and down.
B: The back control makes the backof the seat go up
and down.
C: The center control makes the whole seat
go up and
down or forward and backward.
1-3
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outer
side of
the seat. Release the lever
to lock the seatback where
you want it. Pull up on the lever, and theseat will go to
its original upright position.
1-4
But don't have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
Front Seatback Latches
Sitting in a reclined position whenyour vehicle is
in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle
up, your safety belts can’t do their job when
you’re reclinedlike this.
its job, In a crashyou
The shoulder belt can’t do
could go into it,receiving neckor otherinjuries.
The lap belt can’tdo its job either. In a crashthe
belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt
forces would bethere, not at your pelvic bones.
This could causeserious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seatand wear your safety belt properly.
The frontseatbacks fold
forward to let people get
into the back seat.
To fold a seatback forward, lift the latch located on the
lower backside of the seatback. Then the seatback will
fold forward.
When you return the seatback to its original position,
make sure the seatback is locked. The latch must be
down for the seat to work properly.
I
If the seatback isn’tlocked, it could move forward
in a sudden stopor crash. That could cause injury
to theperson sitting there. Always press rearward
on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
1-5
Folding Rear Seatback
Safety Belts: They’re for Everyone
This part of the manual tellsyou how to use safety belts
properly. It also tells you some things you should do
not
with safety belts.
And it explains theair bag system.
The rear seatback in your vehiclefolds down to provide
more storage space.
To fold the seatback down:
1. Pull forward on both levers.
2. Fold the seatback down.
To raise the seatback:
1. Pull it up to the locked, upright position.
2. Be sure both latches hold the seatback in place. Have
them fixedif they don’t.
Don’t let anyone ride where heor she can’t wear
a safety belt properly.
If you are in acrash and
you’re not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries
can be much worse. You can hit things insidethe
vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously
injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might
not be if you are buckled up. Always fasten your
safety belt,and check that your passengers’ belts
are fastened properlytoo.
I
It is extremelydangerous to ride ina cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed. Do not allow peopleto
ride in any area
of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure
everyone in your vehicle is in aseat and using a
safety belt properly.
4
In most states and Canadian provinces, the law saysto
wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
You never know if you’llbe in a crash. If you do have a
crash, you don’t know ifit will be a badone.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashescan be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In manyof them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Your vehicle has alight that
comes on as a reminder to
buckle up. (See “Safety Belt
Reminder Light” in
the Index.)
1-7
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
c
Take the simplest vehicle.Sumose it's just a seat
on wheels.
1-8
re
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider
doesn't stop.
.
...
I
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, itcould be the windshield ...
1-9
3
I
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down asthe vehicle does.
You get more time tostop. You stop over moredistance,
and your strongest bonestake the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-10
Here Are Questions Many People Ask Q.’ If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
About Safety Belts-- and the Answers
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
Won’t I be trapped in the vehicle after an
e.’
accident if I’m wearing a safety belt?
A:
You could be -- whether you’re wearing a safety
belt or not. But you canunbuckle a safety belt,
even if you’re upside down. And yourchance of
being conscious during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
&.’ If my vehicle has air bags, why shouldI have to
wear safety belts?
A:
accident -- even one that isn’t your fault -- you and
your passengers can behurt. Being a good driver
doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 lunih).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Air bags are in manyvehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts -- not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for salehas required the use of
safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that hasair
bags, you still have to buckle up toget the most
protection. That’s true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-11
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
Lap-Shoulder Belt
Adults
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’show to wear
it properly.
This part is only for people of adult size.
1. Close and lock the door.
Be aware that there arespecial things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different rules
for smaller children and babies.
If a child willbe riding
in your vehicle,see thepart of this manual called
“Children.” Followthose rules for
everyone’s protection.
2. Adjust the seat (to see how, see “Seats” in the Index)
so you can sit up straight.
First, you’ll wantto know whichrestraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
1-12
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
On convertible models, the shoulder belt maylock if
you pullthe belt across you very quickly. If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
4. Push the latchplate into the buckle until it clicks.
If the belt stops before it reaches
the buckle, tiltthe latch
plate and keep pulling until you can buckle the belt.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If
the belt isn’t long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-13
5 . To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap partof the belt should beworn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash,this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should
go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
of the
body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stopor crash.
On convertible models, the safety belt also locks
if you
pull the belt very quickly outof the retractor.
Q."What's wrong with this?
CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder isbelt
too loose. Ina crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A:
The shoulder belt is too loose. It won't give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-15
What’s wrong withthis?
CAUT IN:
3
You can be seriouslyinjured if your belt is
buckled inthe wrong place like this.
In a crash,
the belt wouldgo up over your abdomen, The
belt forces would be
there, not at the pelvic
bones, This could cause
serious internal injuries.
Always buckle your beltinto the buckle
nearest you,
~~
A:
The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-16
@
What's wrong with this?
You can be seriouslyinjured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too
far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too muchforce to the
ribs, which aren't as strongas shoulder bones.
You could also severely
injure internalorgans
like your liver or spleen.
A:
The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-17
e.’
What’s wrong with this?
You can be seriously injured
by a twisted belt.In
a crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the
belt to spread impact forces.If a belt is twisted,
make it straightso it can work properly,
or ask
your dealer tofix it.
A:
The belt is twisted across the body.
1-18
Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy
Safety belts workfor everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, theyare more likely to be
seriously injuredif they don’t wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt,just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before youclose the door, be surethe belt is out of the
way. If you slam the dooron it, you can damage both the
belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below
the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-19
The best way to protect the fetus
is to protect the
mother. When a safety beltis worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key
to making
safety belts effectiveis wearing them properly.
Right Front Passenger Position
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safety belt.See “Driver Position”
earlier in this section.
Air Bag System
This part explains the air bag system.
-- one air bag for the
Your vehicle has two air bags
driver and anotherair bag for the right front passenger.
Here are the most important things to know about
the air
bag system:
- -
-
A CAUTION:
You can be severelyinjured or killed in a crash if
you aren’t wearing your safety belt even if you
have air bags. Wearing your safety beltduring a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things
inside the vehicle or being ejectedfrom it. Air
bags are “supplemental restraints” to the safety
belts. All air bags are designed to work with
safety belts,but don’t replace them. Air bags
are
designed to work only inmoderate to severe
crashes where the front of your vehicle hits
something. Theyaren’t designed toinflate at all
in rollover,rear, side or low-speed frontal
crashes. Everyonein your vehicle should wear a
safety beltproperly whether or not there’s an
air bag for that person.
--
--
1-20
I
Air bags inflate with great force, faster than the
blink of an eye. If you’re too closeto an inflating
air bag, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts
help keep youin position beforeand during a
crash. Always wear your safety belt, even withair
bags. The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Children who are upagainst, or very close to,an
air bag whenit inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults and
older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
system is designedfor them. Young children and
infants need the protection that achild restraint
system can provide. Alwayssecure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see the
part of this manual called “Children” and see the
caution labels on the sunvisors and the right front
passenger’s safety belt.
AIR
BAG
There is an air bag readiness
, light on the instrument
panel, which shows
AIR BAG.
1-21
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See “Air Bag Readiness Light”in the Index
for more information.
. ”
How the Air Bag System Works
The right front passenger’s air bag isin the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
Where are the airbags?
The driver’s air bag is in the
middle of the
steering wheel.
1-22
If something is between an occupant and an air
bag, the bag might not inflate properly
or it
might force the object into that person. The path
of an inflating air bag must
be kept clear. Don’t
put anything between an occupant and an air
bag, and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other air
bag covering.
it can be somewhatabove or below this range. If your
vehicle strikes something that will move or deform, such
as a parked car, the thresholdlevel will be higher.The
air bag is not designedto inflate in rollovers, side
impacts or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether anair
bag should haveinflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicleor because of what the repair costs were.
Inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and
how quickly the vehicle slows down in
frontal or
near-frontal impacts.
What makes an air bag inflate?
When should an air bag inflate?
An air bag is designed toinflate in a moderate to severe
frontal or near-frontal crash. The air bag will inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s designed
“threshold level.” If your vehicle goes straight into a
wall that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold levelis
about 9 to 15 mph (14 to 24 k d h ) . The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
In an impact of sufficient severity, theair bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in crash.
a
The sensing
system triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the air bag. The inflator, air bag and related
hardware are all part of theair bag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel infront of the
right front passenger.
1-23
How does an air bag restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the
instrument panel. Air bags supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body,
stopping the occupant more gradually. But
air bags would
not help you in many types of collisions, including
rollovers, rear impacts and side impacts, primarily because
an occupant’s motion is not toward thoseair bags. Air
bags should never be regarded as anythmg more than
a
supplement to safety belts, and then only
in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions.
What will you seeafter an air
bag inflates?
After an air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module-- the
steering wheel hubfor the driver’s air bag,or the
instrument panelfor the rightfront passenger’s
bag -- will be hot for a short time. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you maybe warm, but not
1-24
too hot to touch.There will be some smoke anddust
coming from vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t preventthe driver from seeing or from
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leavingthe vehicle.
When an airbag inflates,there is dust in the ai
This dust could causebreathing problems for
people with a historyof asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone inthe
vehicle should get out as soon as it is safeto doso.
If you havebreathing problems but can’t getout
of the vehicle after an air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger air bag.
0
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After they
inflate, you’ll need some new parts for your air bag
system. If you don’t get them, the air bag system
won’t be there to help protect you in another crash.
A new system will include air bag modules and
possibly other parts. The service manual for your
vehicle covers the need to replace other parts.
0
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module, which records infomation about
the airbag system. The module records information
about the readiness of the system, when the sensors
are activated and driver’s safety belt usage
at deployment.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
system. Improper service can mean that your air bag
system won’t work properly.See your dealer
for service.
NOTICE:
If you damage the covering for the driver’s or the
right front passenger’s air bag, the bag may not
work properly. You may haveto replace the air
bag module in the steering wheel or both the air
bag module and the instrument panel for the
right front passenger’s air bag.
Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should serviced.
be
There are parts of the air bag system inseveral places
around your vehicle.You don’t want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the Service Manual have informationabout
servicing your vehicle andthe air bag system. To
purchase a service manual, see “Service and Owner
Publications” in the Index.
1-25
Rear Seat Passengers
For upto 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,an air
bag can still inflate during improperservice. You
can be injured if you are close to an air bag when
it inflates. Avoid wires wrapped with yellow tape
or yellow connectors. Theyare probably part of
the air bag system. Besure to follow proper
service procedures,and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
It’s very importantfor rear seat passengersto buckle up!
Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in the rear
seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren I safety belted can be thrown
out of the vehicle ina crash. And they can strike others
in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
I
The air bag system does not need
regular maintenance.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The rear seats have lap-shoulder belts. Here’s how to
wear one properly.
1-26
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let itget twisted.
On convertible models, the shoulder belt may lock if
you pull the belt across you very quickly.If this
happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.
If the belt stopsbefore it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keeppulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see “Safety Belt
Extender” at the end of this section. Make sure the
release button on the buckle is positionedso you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if
you ever had to.
1-27
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on
the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs.
In a crash, this applies
be less likely
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d
to slide under the lap belt.
If you slid under it, the belt
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
of the
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts
body are best ableto take belt restraining forces.
a
The safety belt locksif there’s a sudden stop orcrash.
1-28
On convertible models, the safety belt
also locks if you
pull the belt very quickly
out of the retractor.
You can be seriously hurt
if your shoulder belt is
too loose.In a crash, you wouldmove forward
too much, which could increase injury. The
shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.
To unlatch thebelt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-29
Ch
en
Everyone ina vehicle needsprotection! That includes
infants and all children smaller than adultsize. Neither
the distance traveled northe age and size of the traveler
changes the need, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints.
In fact, the lawin every state in the United States and in
every Canadian provincesays children up to some age
must be restrained while ina vehicle.
1-30
Smaller Children and Babies
'A
I
4UTION:
I
Children who are up against, or very close to,an
air bag when it inflates can be seriouslyinjured
or killed. Air bags pluslap-shoulder belts offer
the best protectionfor adults andolder children,
but not for young childrenand infants. Neither
the vehicle's safety belt systemnor its air bag
system is designed for them. Young children and
infants need the protection that a childrestraint
system can provide. Alwayssecure children
properly in your vehicle.
‘A
CAUTION:
Smaller children and babies should always be
restrained in a child or infantrestraint. The
instructions for the restraint will saywhether it is
the right type and size for your child. A very
young child’ship bones are so small that a
regular belt might notstay low on the hips, as it
should. Instead, the belt will likely be overthe
child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply
force right on the child’s abdomen, which could
cause serious or fatal injuries. So, be sure that
any child small enough for one is alwaysproperly
restrained in a child or infant restraint.
I
Infants need complete support, including support for
the
head and neck. This is necessary because an infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing restraint settlesinto the restraint, so the crash
forces canbe distributed across the strongest part ofthe
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
A baby shouldbe
secured in an appropriate infant restraint.This is so
important that many hospitals today won’t release a
newborn infant to its parents unless thereis an infant
restraint available for the baby’s first tripin a
motor vehicle.
1-31
I
at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 124b. (5.5 kg) baby
will suddenly become a 2404b.(110 kg) force on
your arms. The baby would be almost impossible
to hold.
Secure the baby inan infant restraint.
.
Never hold a baby in your
arms while riding in a
vehicle. A baby doesn’t weigh much until a
crash. During a crash a babywill become so
heavy you can’t holdit. For example, ina crash
CAUTION: (Continued)
--
1-32
Child Restraints
Every time infants and youngchildren ride in
vehicles, they should have protection provided by
appropriate restraints.
@
What are the different typesof add-on
child restraints?
A:
Add-on child restraints are available in four basic
types. When selecting a child restraint, take into
consideration not only the child’s weight
and size,
but also whether or not the restraint will be
compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
An infant car bed (A) is a special bed made for use
in a motor vehicle. It’san infant restraint system
designed to restrain or position a child on a
continuous flat surface. With an infant car bed,
make sure that the infant’s headrests toward the
center of the vehicle.
1-33
A rear-facing infant restraint(B) positions an infant
to face the rear of the vehicle. Rear-facing infant
restraints are designedfor infants of up to about
20 lbs. (9 kg) and aboutone year of age. This type
of restraint faces the rearso that the infant’s head,
neck and body can have the support they need in a
crash. Some infant seatscome in two parts-- the
base stays secured in the vehicle and the seat part
is removable.
1-34
A forward-facing child restraint(C-E) positions a
child upright to face forward in the vehicle. These
forward-facing restraints are designed to help protect
children who are from 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg)and
about 26 to 40 inches (66 to 102 cm) in height, or up
to around four years of age. One type,a convertible
restraint, is designedto be used either asa rear-facing
infant seat ora forward-facing child seat.
1-35
A booster seat (F, G) is designedfor children who
are about 40 to 60 lbs. (18 to 27 kg) and about
four to eight years of age. It’s designed to improve
the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Booster
seats with shields use lap-only belts; however,
booster seats without shields use lap-shoulder
belts. Booster seats can also help a child
to see
out the window.
1-36
When choosing a childrestraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. Ifit is, it
will have a label sayingthat it meets Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards.
Then follow theinstructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on therestraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system in
your vehicle, but the childalso has to be secured within
the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal injury.
The instructions that come with the infant or child
restraint will show you howto do that. Both the owner’s
manual and the child restraint instructions are important,
so if either one of these is not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Putthe Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in therear rather than the front seat. We at
General Motors therefore recommendthat you put your
child restraint in the rear seat. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the front passenger seat. Here’s why:
’-&%
I
CAUTION:
A child in arear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front
passenger’s
air bag inflates. This is because the back of a
rearfacing child restraint would be very closeto
the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing
child restraint in the rear seat.
You may, however, secure a forward-facing child
restraint inthe right frontseat. Before yousecure
a forward-facing child restraint, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go. Or,
secure the child restraint inthe rear seat.
Wherever you installit, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mindthat an unsecured child restraint can move
around in acollision or sudden stop andinjure people in
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle-- even when no child is in it.
1-37
Top Strap
The place wherethe anchor has to go isquite
close to your fuel tank.If the anchor isn’t
installed correctly,it can make a holein the fuel
tank either then, or in a later collision.
Gasoline could leakout and be ignited,and
people inthe vehicle or outside it could be badly
burned. Don’t install the anchoryourself unless
you know youcan do it correctly.
--
Canadian law requires that child restraints have a top
strap, and that the strap be anchored.
If your child restraint hasa top strap, it should be
anchored. If you need to have an anchor installed, you
can ask your Chevrolet dealer
to put it infor you. If you
want to install an anchor yourself, your dealer can tell
you how to doit.
If you have a convertible, don’t use a restraint that has a
top strap in your vehicle because the top strap anchor
cannot be installed properly.
If your child restraint has a top strap, your dealer
can
obtain a kit with anchor hardware and installation
instructions specifically designedfor this vehicle.The
dealer can then install the anchor for you. In Canada,
this work will bedone for you free of charge. Or, you
may install the anchor yourself using the instructions
provided in the kit.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one. Be sure
to follow the instructions that came withthe child
restraint. Secure the child in thechild restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safetybelt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
3. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
If the shoulder belt goes in front of the child’s face or
neck, putit behind the child restraint.
1-39
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure
the release buttonis
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
1-40
5. To tighten the belt, pull up
on the shoulder belt while
you push down on the child restraint. If you’re using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may
find it
helpful to use your knee to push down
on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint,
just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and letit go back all the way.
The safety belt
will move freely again and be ready
to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt.See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure
to follow the instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a rightfront passenger air
bag, always move the seat as
far back as it will go
before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
(See “Seats” inthe Index.)
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
Your vehicle has a rightfront passenger air bag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraintin this seat. Here’s why:
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through
or
around the restraint.The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured if the right front passenger’s air
bag inflates. This is because the back of a
rearfacing child restraint would be very close to
the inflating air bag. Always secure a rear-facing
child restraintin the rear seat.
1-41
4. Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt
if needed.
If the shoulder beltgoes in frontof the child's face or
neck, put it behind the child restraint.
5. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button
is
positioned so you wouldbe able to unbuckle the
safety belt quicklyif you ever had to.
P
Larger Children
A
I
6. To tighten the belt, pull up onthe shoulder belt while
You Push down On the
restraint. you
find it
helpful to use yourknee to push down onthe child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Pushand pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle's
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety belt
will movefreely again and be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
Children who have outgrown child restraints should
wear the vehicle's safety belts.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat. Buttheyneed to use the
safety belts properly.
Children who aren't buckled up can be thrown out in
a crash.
Children who aren't buckled up can strike other
people who are.
1-43
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.The
belt can’t properly spread the impact forces. ’In a
crash, the two childrencan be crushed together
and seriously injured. A belt must be used by
only one personat a time.
&= What if a
childis wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child isso small that the shoulder belt is
very closeto the child’s faceor neck?
A:
Move the child toward the center
of the vehicle, but
be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s
shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper body
would have the restraint that belts provide.
‘A
I
CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child issitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is behind
the child. If the child wearsthe belt in this way, in
a crashthe child might slideunder the belt. The
belt’s force would then be applied right on the
child’s abdomen.That could causeserious or
fatal injuries.
I
Wherever the child sits, thelap portion of the belt
should be worn low and
snug on the hips,just touching
the child’s thighs.This applies beltforce
, . ta
- &e child’s
.. .
pelvic bonesin a crash.
1-45
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should useit.
But if a safety belt isn’t longenough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’sfree. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough
for you. The extender will
be just foryou, and just for theseat in your vehicle that
you choose. Don’t letsomeone else use it, and use it
only for the seat it is made tofit. To wear it, just attach it
to the regular safety belt.
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight
and all yourbelts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and
anchorages are working properly. Lookfor any other
loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see
anything that might keepa safety belt systemfrom
doing itsjob, have itrepaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Also look for any openedor broken air bag covers, and
have them repairedor replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
1-46
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts?
After a very minorcollision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts werestretched, as they would be if worn
during a more severe crash, then you need newbelts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will needto have safety belt
or seat parts repaired or replaced. New parts and
repairs
may be necessary even if the belt wasn’t being used
at
the time of thecollision.
If an air bag inflates, you’ll needto replace air bag
system parts.See the parton the air bag systemearlier
in this section.
b%
NOTES
1-47
1-48
0 Section 2
FeaturesandControls
Here you can learn about the many standard and optional features on your vehicle, and information on starting,
shifting and braking. Also explained are the instrument panel and the warning systems thattell you if everything is
working properly -- and what to do if you havea problem.
2-2
2-4
2-7
2- 12
2- 13
2- 15
2-18
2-19
2-24
2-25
2-27
2-28
2-30
Keys
Door Locks
Keyless Entry (If Equipped)
Hatch
Theft
Vehicle andContent Theft-DeterrenVAlarm
System (If Equipped)
[email protected]
Feature Customization (if Equipped)
New Vehicle “Break-In”
Ignition Positions
Starting Your Engine
Engine Coolant Heater (Canada Only)
Automatic Transmission Operation
2-34
2-37
2-39
2-4 1
2-4 1
2-43
2-43
2-44
2-45
2-50
2-52
2-54
2-72
2-75
Manual Transmission Operation
Parking Brake
Shifting Into PARK (P)
Parking Over Things That Bum
Engine Exhaust
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
Windows
Tilt Steering Wheel
Turn SignaVMultifunctionLever
Exterior Lamps
Interior Lamps
Mirrors
Instrument Panel
Warning Lights, Gages andIndicators
2-1
Keys
.A
CAUTION:
I
Leaving young children in a vehicle with the
ignition key is dangerous for many reasons.
A child or others could be badly injured or
even killed.
They could operate power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. Don't
leave the keys in a vehicle with young children.
2-2
The ignition keys are for
the ignition only.
The ignition keys don’t haveplugs. Instead, they have
bar-coded key tags. These tags may be removed by
your dealer or even before the vehicle is delivered to
your dealer.
Each plug hasa code on it that tells yourdealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extradoor keys. Keep
the plugs in a safeplace. If you lose your door keys,
you’ll be able to have new ones made using these plugs.
I
If you need a new ignition key, go to your dealer, who
can obtain the correct key code. In an emergency, call
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA.
(In Canada call 1-800-268-2800.)
The door keys are for the
I
doors and all other locks.
I
I
I NOTICE:
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes the
plugs from the keys, and gives them to the firstowner.
Your vehicle has a number of features that can
help prevent theft. But you can have
a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever
lock your keys inside.You may even have to
So be sure you
damage your vehicle to get in.
have extra keys.
2-3
Door Locks
I
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Passengers especially children can easily
open the doors and fall out. When adoor is
locked, the inside handle won’t open it.
Outsiders can easily enter through an unlocked
door when you slow downor stop your vehicle.
This may not beso obvious: You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle ina
crash if the doors aren’t locked. Wear safety belts
properly, lockyour doors, and you will befar
better off whenever youdrive your vehicle.
--
--
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
2-4
From the outside, use your door key.
(If your vehicle has
the Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrentlAlarm System
and it is armed, unlocking and openinga door thisway
will set off the alarm. See “Vehicle and Content
Theft-DeterrenVAlarm System” in the Index.)
Power Door Locks (If Equipped)
U
From the inside, to lock the door, move the lock
control on the door backward.
To unlock the door,move the lock controlon the
door forward.
Press the powerdoor lock switch to lock or unlock both
doors at once. Note: Operating the power locks may
affect the Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrenUAlarm
System (if you have this option). See “Vehicle and
Content Theft-Deterrent /Alarm System” in the Index.
The lock switch worksat all times, except during
“Lockout Prevention” (if thatfeature is programmed).
The unlock switch only works in RUN, ACC and RAP.
(See “Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.)
2-5
Last Door Closed Locking (If Equipped)
Lockout Prevention(If Equipped)
If you have power doorlocks, you can program your
vehicle to havea delayed locking of the doors. This lets
you or your passengersexit the vehicle after you’ve
pressed the power door lock switch. All the
doors will
lock once everyone has gotten out of the vehicle and
closed their doors..
To protect you from locking your keysin the vehicle,
this feature stops the power door locks from locking
when the keys are in the ignition and a door is open. If
the power lock switchis pressed when a door is open,a
chime will sound five times as a reminder to take the
keys out of the ignition before locking the door.
This
feature is shipped from thefactory with the ignition
position in ON. If you would like to turn this feature
off, see “Feature Customization”in the Index.
When the power door lock switchis pressed, a chime
will soundthree times, indicating that the Last Door
Closed Lockingfeature has been activated. Pressing the
LOCK switch againwill lock thedoors immediately.
Pressing the UNLOCK switch willcancel a previously
requested Last Door Closed Locking.
This feature is shipped from the factory with the ignition
position in OFF. To turn this feature on, see “Feature
Customization” in the Index.
2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving thevehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from inside. Then get out and
close the door.
Keyless Entry System(If Equipped)
If your vehicle hasthis option, you can lock and unlock
your doors or unlock your hatchfrom about 3 feet (1 m)
up to 30 feet (9 m) away using the keyless entry
transmitter supplied with yourvehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmfulinterference,
and (2) this device must accept anyinterference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may notcause interference, and ( 2 ) this
device must accept anyinterference received, including
interference that maycause undesired operation of
the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized servicefacility could void authorizationto
use this equipment.
3-Button Transmitter
4-Button Transmitter
Your keyless entry system operateson a radio frequency
subject to Federal Communications Commission(FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
2-7
This system has a range of about
3 feet (1 m) up to
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease
in
range. This is normal for any keyless entry system.
If the transmitter does not work
or if you haveto
stand closer to your vehiclefor the transmitter to work,
try this:
0
Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See the instructions that follow.
0
Check the distance.You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
0
Check the location. Other vehicles
or objects may be
blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the left or
right, hold thetransmitter higher, and try again.
0
If you’re still having trouble, see your dealer
or a
qualified technicianfor service.
2-8
Operation
The driver’s door will unlock automatically when
UNLOCK is pressed. If UNLOCKis pressed again
within five seconds, the passenger’s door will
also
unlock. All doors will lock when LOCK
is pressed.
The hatch will unlock when the button with the trunk
symbol is pressed twice withinfive seconds, as long as
the ignitionis turned to OFF.If the ignitionis on, the
trunk button will only work
if the transmissionis in
PARK (P) for an automatic transmission,or if the
parking brake is.set on a manual transmission.
The system will turn on theinterior lamps for about
40 seconds (or until the ignitionis turned to RUN),
when you unlock the doorsor hatch. The interior
lamps willgo off when you lock thedoors.
Operating the keyless entry transmitter may interact
with the Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrendAlarm
System (if you have thisoption). See “Vehicle and
Content Theft-DeterrendAlarm System’’ in the Index.
You may have to synchronize your transmitter to
the receiver in your vehicle. See the instructions
for synchronization.
A l a r d a n i c Mode
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle andContent
Theft-DeterrenVAlarm System, you will have a fourth
button on your transmitter. This button is the panic
button. If you are involved in a panic situation, press
this button and your vehicle’s horn will
sound and the
headlamps will flash. Thiswill draw neededattention to
you and your vehicle. To turn this feature off, either
push the panic button again or turn the ignition to the
RUN position. Note: This feature will not workif your
ignition is on or if the transmitter is 30 feet (9 m) or
more away from your vehicle.
Transmitter Range
The range of your keyless entry system should be about
30 feet (9 m). At times you may notice a decrease in the
range. This isnormal for any keyless entrysystem. If
the transmitter does not work, or you have to stand
closer to your vehicle for thetransmitter to work:
0
You may have to replace the battery in your transmitter.
See the instructions for battery replacement.
0
You may be too far from your vehicle. Check your
distance. You may have to stand closer to your
vehicle in rain or snow.
0
You may have to match the transmitters to your
vehicle. See instructions.
If none of the above apply,see your dealer or
qualified technician for service.
Synchronization
Synchronization may be necessary due to the security
method used by the keyless entry system.The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to
the receiver. The
receiver will not respond toa signal it has been sent
previously. This prevents anyone from recoding and
playing back the signal from the transmitter.
To
resynchronize the transmitter with the receiver:
0
While standing close to your vehicle, at the same
UNLOCK buttons
time press and hold the LOCK and
on the transmitterfor about eight seconds.The door
locks should cycle and the parking lamps should
flash to confirm synchronization.If this does not
happen, you may needto replace the battery in your
transmitter or match the transmitter to vour vehicle.
Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking thesignal, Take a few stepsto the rightor left.
2-9
Transmitter Verification(If Equipped)
Theft-DeterrenVAlann System (if your vehicle
has this option).
This feature provides feedbackto the holder of the
2. Remove the RADIOfuse. This fuse is located in the
keyless entry transmitter that a command has been
main fuse block which is located on theleft side of
received by the keyless entry receiver.
The parking
your main instrument panel. When the
fuse block is
lamps will flashon every lock and unlock command and
open the radiofuse is located onthe lower right hand
the horn will sound only if the
LOCK button is pressed
corner of your instrument panel.
See “Fuses and
twice within five seconds. This allows for silent
Circuit Breakers’’ in the Index.
operation of locking and unlocking, unless a confirming
horn chirp isdesired. Other options may be selectedfor
3. Turn the ignition from OFF to RUN three times
this feature (see “Feature Customization”in the Index).
quickly (within five seconds). The vehicle will
respond by locking the doors, unlockingthe driver’s
Matching Transmitter(s) To Your Vehicle
doors and releasing the hatch.
Your transmitter is
Each keyless entry transmitter is coded to prevent another now ready to match the vehicle.
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter
4. Press and hold the LOCKand UNLOCK buttons on
is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through
the first transmitter for 15 seconds. The vehicle will
your dealer. Rememberto bring any remaining
respond
as in Step 3.
transmitters withyou when you go to your dealer. When
the dealer matches the replacement transmitter to your 5. Repeat Step 4 for the remaining transmitters.
vehicle, any remaining transmitters must also be matched.
6. When you have finished matching all of your
Once your dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitters, replace theRADIO fuse.
transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Each vehicle can
7. Check that all transmitters work by pressing
have only four transmitters matched
to it.
their buttons.
Have each transmitter you intendto match ready for the
If the transmitters don’t work,or if you’d rather not
next steps. To match transmittersto your vehicle:
match the transmitters yourself,see your dealer.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, then to OFF. This
will disarm the Vehicle and Content
2-10
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, thebattery in your keyless entry
transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have to
get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably timeto change the battery.
Use one battery, type CR2032, or a similar type.
NOTICE:
When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch anyof the circuitry. Static from your
body transferred to these surfaces may damage
the transmitter.
To replace the battery in thekeyless entry transmitter:
1. Carefully pryoff the cover by inserting a dime
(or similar object) in the slot between the covers
and twist.
2. Lift off the back cover.
3. Remove andreplace the battery. Useone battery,
type CR2032, or a similar type. Put the new battery
in printed side down.
4. Replace the front cover. Make sure the cover is on
tightly so water won’t get in.
5. Check the transmitter operation. If the transmitter
does not workafter battery replacement, it may need
to be resynchronized or matched to your vehicle. See
“Synchronization” in theIndex.
2-11
Hatch
It can be dangerous to drive with the hatch open
because carbon monoxide (CO) gascan come into
your vehicle. You can’t seeor smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousnessand even death.
If you must drive with the hatch open or if
electrical wiring or other cable connections
must passthrough the seal between the body
and the hatch:
0 Make sure all windows are shut.
%rn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed withthe setting
on VENT. That will force outside air into
your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls” in
the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, openthem all the way.
See ‘(Engine Exhaust’’ the
in Index.
2-12
Hatch Release
Your door key opens the hatchfrom the outside.
If your vehicle has the Vehicle and Content
Theft-DeterrendAlarm System andit is armed, use
the transmitter, not the key
to open the hatchor the
alarm will sound.
Remote Hatch Release(If Equipped)
I
Press the switch under the
lamp control below the
instrument panel to unlock
the hatch from inside
your vehicle.
I NOTICE:
If you put things in the hatchback area, be sure
they won’t break the glass when you close it.
Never slam the hatch down. You could break the
glass or damage the defogger grid
(if equipped).
On vehicles with the Vehicle and Content
Theft-DeterrenUAlarm System: The hatch switch will
not work while the system is armed.See “Vehicle and
Content Theft-Deteuent/Alarm System” in the Index.
If you have an automatic transmission, your shiftlever
must be in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) to use the
switch. If you have a manual transmission and the
ignition switch is in RUN, you must set the parking
brake before you can use the
switch.
The switch only works when theignition is in RUN,
ACC or when RAP is present. (See “Retained
Accessory Power” in the Index.)
Theft
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle hasa number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we puton it can make
it impossible to steal. However, there are ways you
can help.
2-13
Key in the Ignition
Parking Lots
If you leave your vehicle with the keys
inside, it’s an
easy targetfor joyriders or professional thieves -- so
don’t do it.
If you park in a lot where someone will be watching
your vehicle, it’s best to lockit up and take your keys.
But what if you haveto leave your ignition key?
When you park your vehicle and open the
driver’s door,
you’ll heara chime reminding youto remove your key
from the ignition andtake it with you. Alwaysdo this.
Your steering wheel will belocked, and so will your
ignition. If you have an automatic transmission, taking
your keyout also locks your transmission. And
remember to lock the doors.
0
If possible, park in a busy, well lit area.
0
Put your valuables ina storage area, like yourglove
box. Be sure to close and lock thestorage area.
0
Close all windows.
0
Lock the glove box.
0
Lock all the doors except the driver’s.
0
Then take the door key and keyless entry
transmitter
with you.
Parking at Night
Park in a lighted spot, close all windows and lock your
vehicle. Rememberto keep your valuables outof sight.
Put them ina storage area, or take them with you.
2-14
Vehicle and Content
Theft-DeterrenUAlarm System
(If Equipped)
If your vehicle hasthis option, it has a theft-deterrent
alarm system. Once armed, the system will soundthe
horn and flash the parking lamps if the vehicle is
broken into.
Shock Sensor
The shock sensor is what triggers the alarm when it
detects a blow to your vehicle. Itis located over the
right rear wheelhouse near the sparetire in the hatch
area. There are two levels of alarms via the shock
sensor: Two hornblasts and parking lamp flashes for
non-threatening blows to the vehicle anda full
two-minute alarm for harder blows to the vehicle.
Its sensitivity can be adjusted if more or
less sensitivity
is desired. (Note: If sensitivity is increased too much,
it may give false alarms caused by gustsof wind or
other natural events that may shake the vehicle.)
To adjust, remove the label covering the adjustment
knob and adjust as desired. Turn to the right
(clockwise) to increase sensitivity and turnto the left
(counterclockwise) to decrease sensitivity.The shock
sensor is ignored by the alarm system when the ignition
is on, when the hatch is open, when the alarm is
disarmed, when customizedto be ignored and for
five seconds after the horn sounds an alarmor chirp.
The shock sensor is ignoredafter triggering three full
alarms until the systemis rearmed.
Coupe
Convertible
2-15
Keyless Entry Transmitter Locking
Arming the System
The alarm system can be
armed todetect break-ins
by locking your vehicle
using the keyless entry or
by locking thedoors with
the power door lock switch.
Passive armingis also available, if you would like the
system to arm all by itself after the doors have been
closed for ashort time. When the system is armed, a red
light will flash briefly once every two seconds. (Note:If
you return to your vehicle and the red
light is flashing
two brief flashes every twoseconds, the system is armed
and the shock sensor hadtriggered a two minute alarm.
If the red light is flashing threetimes every twoseconds,
the systemis armed and there wasan intrusion that
sounded the alarm.) Horn chirps and parking lamp
flashes can be setto your choice.
2-16
If all the doorsare closed, locking the vehicle with
the transmitter will immediately armthe system. The
horn will chirp twice andthe parking lamps willflash,
confirming that the system is armed. If any door is open
when the transmitter LOCK button is pressed, the
system goesinto an armed wait mode, waitingfor the
doors to close. Once they are closed, the system will
arm, the horn chirps twice andthe parking lamps will
flash. If the hatch is open or ajar at the time the system
is arming, the horn will onlychirp once.
Power Door Lock Switch Locking
If any door is open when the powerdoor lock switch
is pressed, the system goesinto an armed wait mode,
waiting for the doors to close. Once they are closed,the
system will arm and the parking lamps will
flash. If both
of the doors are closed when the lock switch is pressed,
the system assumes youare inside the vehicle, so it will
not arm. Note: Lockingthe doors by using the manual
door locks will not arm the system.
Passive Arming
If the ignition was
just turned off and a door was
opened, the system will arm six seconds after both doors
are closed, whether or not you lock them. In allother
cases, the system will wait30 seconds after both doors
are closed before arming, allowing you time
to get into
the vehicle and put the keyin the ignition. The parking
lamps will flash when the system arms. Passive arming
is not enabled from the factory.
Disarming the System
button again or turn the ignition switchto RUN to stop
the alarm.
If the alarm is sounding due to the shock sensoror a
door or hatch opening, it can be turned offby either
turning the ignition switch with
a proper key inserted or
by pressing any button on the keyless entry transmitter.
If you use your keyless entry transmitter to silence the
alarm, additional things will happen depending upon
which button you press.
0
Pressing the UNLOCK button will turn the alarm
off, unlock the driver’s door and disarm the system.
0
Pressing the LOCK button will turn the alarm off,
keep the doors locked and keep the system armed.
0
Pressing the trunk symbol button will turn the alarm
off and keep the system armed.A second pushof the
button (within five seconds) will unlockand disarm
the hatch only.
0
Pressing the panic button will turn the alarm off,
keep the doors locked andkeep the system armed.
There are two ways to disarm the system:
1. Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless entry
transmitter. If the horn chirps twoor three times
when you unlock the car, the alarm sounded in your
absence. Two chirps meansthat the shock sensor
was set off and three chirps means
that a dooror the
hatch was opened.
2. Turn the ignition toRUN with the proper key.
For more information on customizing the features
mentioned here, see “Feature Customization” inthe Index.
’Ibrning Off the Alarm
If you started the alarm by pressing the panic button on
the keyless entry transmitter, you must either push that
If the alarm is sounding because an incorrect ignition
key was used, press any button on
the keyless entry
transmitter to turnthe alarm off.
The alarm will stop by itself after two minutes.
2-17
[email protected]
1
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-KeyI1
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key I1 is a passive
theft-deterrent system.
It works when you insert
or remove the key from
the ignition.
PASS-Key I1 uses aresistor pellet in the ignition key
that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
When the PASS-KeyI1 system senses that someoneis
using the wrong key,it shuts down the vehicle’sstarter
and fuel systems. For aboutthree minutes, thestarter
won’t work andfuel won’t go to the engine.If someone
tries to start your vehicle againor uses another key
during this time, the vehicle will not start. This
discourages someone from randomly trying different
keys with different resistor pelletsin an attemptto
make a match.
2-18
The ignition key mustbe clean and dry before it’s
inserted inthe ignition or the engine may not start.
If
the engine does not start and the
SECURITY light stays
on when youtry to start the vehicle, the key may be
dirty or wet. Turn the ignition off.
Clean and dry the key. Wait about
three minutes and try
again. The SECURITY light may remain on duringthis
time. If the starter still won’t work, and the key appears
to be clean and dry, wait about
three minutes and try
another ignition key. Atthis time, you may also wantto
check the fuses (see “Fuses and Circuit Breakers”in the
Index). If the starter won’t work with the other key, your
vehicle needs service.If your vehicle does start, thefirst
ignition key may be faulty.
See your dealer or a
locksmith who canservice the PASS-Key 11.
If you accidentally use a key that has a damaged
or
missing resistor pellet, the starter won’t work.
The
SECURITY light will flash. But you
don’t have to wait
three minutes before trying another ignition key.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service the
PASS-Key I1 to have a new key made.
If you’re ever driving and the SECURITY light comes
on and stays on, you will beable to restart your engine
if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key I1 system, however,
is not working properly and must beserviced by
your dealer.Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key I1 system.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key I1 ignition key, see
your dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key I1
to have a new key made. In an emergency, call the
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Center at
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-243-8872).
Feature Customization(If Equipped)
Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be
programmed with several different features. The
features you can program depend upon the options that
came with your vehicle. The following list tells you the
features that can be programmed. Listed next to each
feature is the option you need tohave on yourvehicle in
order to be able toprogram that particular feature.
0
Exit Lighting (available for all)
0
Delayed Illumination (available for all)
Last Door Closed Locking (ifequipped with power
door locks)
Lockout Prevention (if equipped with power
door locks)
Keyless Entry Verification (if equipped with Vehicle
and Content Theft-DeterrendAlarm System)
Theft-Deterrent Arming Method (if equipped with
Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrenUAlarm System)
Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification (if equipped with
Vehicle and Content Theft-Deterrent/Alarm System)
Driver’s Door Alarm Delay (if equipped with
Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrenUAlannSystem)
Shock Sensor Enable (if equipped with Vehicle and
Content Theft-DeterrendAlarm System)
2-19
‘To program features, your vehicle mustbe in the
programming mode. Follow thesesteps:
1. Put your keyin the ignition.
2. Turn the ignitionto RUN to disarm the Vehicle
and Content Theft-DeterrentIAlarm System.
3. Turn the ignition to OFF position.
4. Remove the RADIOfuse. This fuse isin the
main fuse block, located on theleft side of your
instrument panel. Whenthe main fuse block is
open, the RADIO fuse is located in the lower
right cornerside of the fuse panel. See “Fuses and
Circuit Breakers” in the Index.
5. Turn the ignitionto ACC.
You should hear achime to verify that the system
is in programming mode.If the chime sounds once,
you will be ableto program Exit Lighting, Delayed
Illumination, Last Door Closed Locking and Lockout
Prevention only. If the chime sounds twice and your
vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle and Content
Theft-Deterrent System, you willalso be able to
set Keyless Entry Verification, Arming Method,
Arming Verification, Driver’s Door Delay and
Shock Sensor Enable.
2-20
Exit Lighting and Delayed Illumination
With Exit Lighting, your interior lamps will come on
for up to 25 seconds when the keyis removed from
the ignition.
With Delayed Illumination, your interior lamps will come
on and stayon for up to 25 seconds when entering the
vehicle and upto 5 seconds when leaving your vehicle.
Your vehicle comes with both features enabled (Mode4).
To change the factory setting,do the following:
1. Turn the courtesy lamps on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control knob all the way up.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of
chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is set for.
3. Turn the courtesy lamp switch to off.
4. Turn the courtesy lamp switch from on to off until
you hear the numberof chimes that corresponds to
the mode selection you want.
Mode 1: Both Off
Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only
Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only
Mode 4: Both On
Last Door Closed Locking and
Lockout Prevention
Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode2. This
means that your power door locks will not lock when
the keys are in the ignition and a door is open. To
change the factory setting, do the following:
1. Press the LOCK switch on the door.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear.The number of
chimes tellsyou which mode your vehicle is set for.
3. Press the LOCK switch on the door until you hear
the number of chimes that correspond to the mode
selection you want.
Mode 1: Both Off (Doors will lockhnlock when you
press the power door lock switch).
Mode 2: Lockout Prevention Only (If you leave your
keys in the ignition and get out the driver’s door, you
won’t be able to lock the doors with the power door
lock switch).
Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power
door lock switch is usedto lock the vehicle while any
door is open, you will hear three chimes. The doors will
not lock untilafter all doors are closed).
Mode 4: Both On (This combines Mode 2 and 3).
Keyless Entry Verification
Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 5 . This
means that when you use
the keyless entry transmitter to
1ocWunlock yourvehicle, your parking lamps willflash
briefly upon the first press on LOCK. Your horn will
sound briefly and yourparking lamps willflash briefly
upon the second press on LOCK. Your parking lamps
will flash briefly upon any press on UNLOCK.
To
change the factory setting, do the following:
1. Press the UNLOCK button on the keyless
entry transmitter.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of
chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is set for.
3. Press the UNLOCK button onthe keyless entry
transmitter until you hear the numberof chimes that
correspond to the mode selection you want.
Mode 1: All Off (The headlamps will notflash and the
horn will not soundto provide you feedback that a
1ocWunlock command has been
received by the keyless
entry transmitter).
Mode 2: Horn and LampsLamps (Your horn will sound
briefly and your parking lamps will
flash when you
press LOCK on thekeyless entry transmitter. Only your
parking lamps willflash when you press UNLOCK).
2-21
Mode 3: Horn and Lamps (Your horn will sound briefly
and your parking lamps willflash every time you push
LOCK and UNLOCK).
Mode 4: Lamps (Your parking lamps will flash every
time you press LOCK andUNLOCK).
Mode 5: Lamps/Horn andLampsLamps (Your lamps
will flash upon the first press on LOCK, yourlamps
will flash and your horn will sound upon the second
press on LOCK and your lamps will
flash upon any
press on UNLOCK).
3. Press the UNLOCK switchon the door until you
hear the numberof chimes that correspond to the
mode selection you want.
Mode 1: Alarm System Off (The system will not arm).
Mode 2: Keyless Entry Transmitter Lock (When you
lock yourdoors using the keyless entry transmitter,
the system will arm itself).
Theft-Deterrent Arming Method
Mode 3: Keyless Entry TransmitterRower Door Lock
Switch (If you use either the keyless entry transmitter
or the power door lock switchto lock the doors, the
system will arm itself).
Your vehicle comes withthis feature set in Mode 3. This
means that both your keyless entry transmitter and
the
power door lock switch will actively arm the system.
To change the factorysetting, do the following:
Mode 4: Passive arming and Keyless Entry
TransmitterPower Door Lock SwitchArming (The
system will arm itself afterall doors are closed, plus
arming per mode 3).
1. Press the UNLOCK switch on the door.
2. Count the numberof chimes you hear. The number
of chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is
set for.
2-22
Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification
Your vehicle comes withthis feature set in Mode 3.
This means that if you arm the system using the keyless
entry transmitter, your parking lamps will
flash and your
horn will chirp twiceto verify that the system is armed.
If it only chirps once, the hatchis open or unlatched. If
you arm the system usingeither the power door lock
switch or by passive arming, onlythe parking lamps
will flash for verification. To change the factory setting,
do the following:
1. Press the LOCK switch on the keyless
entry transmitter.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of
chimes tells you which mode your vehicle is set for.
3. Press the LOCK switch on the keyless entry
transmitter until you hear the number
of chimes that
corresponds to the mode selection you want.
Mode 1: All Off (No horn chirps or parking lamp flash).
Mode 2: Horn and Lamps (Your parkinglamps will
flash and your horn will chirptwice to verify the system
is armed using any arming method).
Mode 3: Horn and LampsLamps (If you use the keyless
entry transmitter to arm the system, your parking lamps
will flash and your horn will chirp twice
to verify that
the system is armed. If you useeither the powerdoor
lock switch or passive arming, only your lamps will
flash for verification).
Mode 4: Lamps (When your vehicle arms, only your
parking lamps will flash for verification).
Driver’s Door Alarm Delay and Shock
Sensor Enable
Your vehicle comes with this feature set in Mode 4.
This means thatif you open the driver’sdoor using
your key, the alarm will not sound
for eight seconds.
Also the shock sensor, ableto detect sharp blowsto
your vehicleis active. To change the factory setting,
do the following:
1. Turn the parking lamps on and off.
2. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number of
chimes tells you which mode your vehicle
is set for.
3. Turn the parking lamps on andoff until you hear the
number of chimes that corresponds to the mode
selection you want.
2-23
Mode 1: Zero Delay and Shock Sensor Disabled (The
alarm will sound immediately if the driver’s
door is
opened with your key and the shock sensor will not
be
available to measure sharp blowsto your vehicle).
Mode 2: Eight-Second Delay and Shock Sensor
Disabled (The alarm will soundeight seconds after the
driver’s dooris opened with your key and the shock
sensor will notbe available to measure sharp blows
to your vehicle).
Mode 3: Zero Delay and Shock Sensor Enabled (The
alarm will sound immediately after the
driver’s door is
opened with your key and the shock sensor will be
available to measure sharp blows to your vehicle).
Mode 4: Eight-Second Delay and Shock Sensor
Enabled (The alarm will soundeight seconds after the
driver’s dooris opened with your key and the shock
sensor willbe available to measure sharp blowsto
your vehicle).
Leaving ProgrammingMode
When programming is done, turn the ignition switchto
OFF and replace theRADIO fuse.
2-24
New Vehicle “Break-In”
NOTICE:
Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate
“break-in.” But itwill perform better in the
long
run if you follow these guidelines:
Keep your speedat 55 mph (88 k m h ) o r
less for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first
200 miles (322 km) orso. During this time
your new brake linings aren’t yet broken
in. Hard stops withnew linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement.
Follow this breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake linings.
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in.
See “Towing a Trailer” in the Index for
more information.
--
--
Ignition Positions
With the ignition key in the ignition, you can turn the
switch to five positions.
C
/
A
LOCK (B): The only position from which youcan
remove the key. This locks your steering wheel, ignition
and automatic transmission.
If you have an automatic transmission, the ignition
switch can’t be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
OFF (C): Unlocks the steering wheel, ignition and
automatic transmission, butdoes not send electrical
power to any accessories. Use this position if your
vehicle must be pushedor towed. A warning tone will
sound if you open the driver’sdoor when the ignition is
in OFF and the keyis in the ignition.
\
E
RUN (D): Position to which the switchreturns after you
start your engine andrelease the switch. The switch
stays in RUN when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running,you can use RUN to
operate yourelectrical power accessories andto display
some instrument panel warning andindicator lights.
ACC (A): Position in which youcan operate your
electrical power accessories. Press in the ignition switch
as you turn the topof it toward you.
2-25
START (E): Starts the engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition will returnto RUN for
NOTICE:
normal driving.
Note that even if the engine
is not running,ACC and
RUN allow youto operate yourelectrical accessories,
such as the radio and ventilationfan.
I a CAUTION:
On manual transmission vehicles,turning the key
to LOCK will lock the steering columnand result
in a lossof ability to steer the vehicle. This could
cause a collision. If you needto turn the engine
off while the vehicle is moving, turn the key only
to OFF.
2-26
I
If your key seems stuck LOCK
in
and you can’t
turn it, be sure you are using the correct key; if
so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the
key hard. But turn the key only with your hand.
Using a tool to forceit could break the key or the
ignition switch.If none of this works,then your
vehicle needs service.
Key Release Button
If you have a manual
transmission, your ignition
lock has a key release
button. You must press
the button before you can
take your key out
of the
ignition lock.
Starting Your Engine
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector should be in NEUTRAL(N). Hold
the clutch pedal to the floorand start the engine. Your
vehicle won’t start if the clutch pedal is not all the way
down -- that’s a safety feature.
Move your shift leverto PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position -- that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
I NOTICE:
Don’t try to shift to PARK (P) if your Chevrolet
is moving.If you do, you coulddamage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P)only whenyour
vehicle is stopped.
1. Without pushing the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. Whenthe engine starts, let
go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your
engine gets warm.
NOTICE:
Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to be
drained much sooner. Andthe excessive heat can
damage your starter motor.
2. If it doesn’t start right away, hold your key in
START for about three to five seconds at a time until
your engine starts. Wait about 15 seconds between
each try to help avoid draining your battery or
damaging your starter.
2-27
3. If your engine still won’t start(or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way
to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the keyin
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stopsagain, do the same thing, but
this time keep the pedal down
for five or six seconds.
This clears the extra gasoline from the engine.
After waiting about15 seconds, repeat the normal
starting procedure.
Engine Coolant Heater
(Canada Only)
I NOTICE:
Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change theway
the engine operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you don’t,
your engine might notperform properly.
If you ever have to have your
vehicle towed, see
the partof this manual thattells how to doit
without damaging yourvehicle. See “Towing
Your Vehicle” in theIndex.
2-2s
In very cold weather,0°F (- 18 C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You’ll get
easier starting and
better fuel economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant heater shouldbe plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
O
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could
be damaged.
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrapthe electrical cord.
The cord is attached to theoutside of the underhood
fuse box.
3. Plug it intoa normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
A CA’ TIQ‘T:
I
How long should youkeep the coolant heater plugged
in? Theanswer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, weask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advicefor
that particular area.
Plugging the cord into
an ungrounded outlet
could causean electrical shock. Also,the wrong
kind of extension cord could overheat and cause
a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the
cord into a properly
grounded three-prong
110-volt AC outlet. If the cord won’t reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for
at least 15 amps.
2-29
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
It is dangerous to get out or your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the
parking brakefirmly set.Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leaveyour vehicle whenthe engine is
running unless you have to.
If you have leftthe
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re fairly
on
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move the shift lever toPARK (P).
See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index. If
you’re pulling atrailer, see “Towinga Trailer” in
the Index.
PARK (P): This locks your rear wheels. It’sthe best
position to use when you start your engine because your
vehicle can’t move easily.
2-30
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
Ensure the shift leveris fully inPARK (P) before starting
connect with the wheels.To restart when you’re
the engine. Your vehicle has a Brake-Transmission Shift
already moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use
Interlock (BTSI).You have to fully apply your regular
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
brakes before you can shift from
PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shiftout of
PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever--push the
shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and also release the
shift lever button on floor shift console models as you
maintain brake application. Then move the shift lever
Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while
into the gear you wish. (Press the shift lever button before
your engine is “racing” (running at high speed) is
moving the shift lever on floor shift console models.)
dangerous. Unlessyour foot is firmly on the
See “Shifting Outof PARK (P)” in this section.
brake pedal, your vehicle could move very
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
rapidly. You could losecontrol and hit people or
objects. Don’t shift out of PARK (P) or
NEUTRAL (N) while your engine is racing.
NOTICE:
Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is movingforward could damage your
transmission. Shift to REVERSE (R)only
after your vehicle is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back andforth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission,see
“Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow” in the Index.
NOTICE:
Damage to your transmission caused by shifting
out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) with the
engine racing isn’t covered by your warranty.
2-31
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@):
This position is for normal driving. If you need more
power for passing, and you’re:
- Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
- Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more
power.
DRIVE (D): This position is also used for normal
driving, however, it offers more power and lower fuel
economy than AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(@).
Here are some timesyou might choose DRIVE (D)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
(a):
- When driving on hilly, winding roads.
- When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
- When going down a steep hill.
2-32
SECOND (2): This position givesyou more power but
lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on hills.
It can help control your speed
as you go down steep
mountain roads, but then you wouldalso want to use
your brakesoff and on.
I NOTICE:
Don’t drive inSECOND (2) for more than 25 miles
(40 km), or at speeds over55 mph (88 km/h), or
you can damage your transmission. Use
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (@)or DRIVE (D)
as much as possible.
Don’t shift intoSECOND (2) unless you are going
slower than65 mph (105 kmk), or you can
damage your engine.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2).You canuse it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the
selector lever is put in FIRST (1) gear, the transmission
won’t shift into first gear until the vehicle is going
slowly enough.
NOTICE:
If your rear wheels can’t rotate, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if you were stuck in
very deep sand or mud or were up against a solid
object. You could damage your transmission.
Also, if you stop when going uphill, don’t hold
your vehicle there with onlythe accelerator
pedal. This could overheat and damage the
transmission. Use your brakes or shift into
PARK (P)to hold your vehicle in position
on a hill.
Maximum engine speed is limited to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
Second-Gear Start(V6 Automatic)
(If Equipped)
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a
Second-Gear Start feature.
Press the Second Gear
Start (SGS) switch onthe
instrument panel to provide
more traction when you are
starting on ice or other
slippery surfaces.
The light on the switch willilluminate when Second
Gear Start (SGS) is selected. The transmission will be
in SECOND (2) gear when the vehicle begins to
move. After starting in SECOND (2), the vehicle will
upshift normally.
This feature is only for improved traction whenthe road
surface is slippery andis not intended for continuous
use. Always useNORMAL Second Gear Start (SGS)
“OFF” for normal roadconditions. You may press the
Second Gear Start (SGS) switch again toturn off this
feature. The light on the switch will go out. Whenever
you start your vehicle, the transmission is inthe
NORMAL mode.
2-33
Manual Transmission Operation
5-Speed
I
3
5
This is yourshift pattern.
Here’s how tooperate
your transmission:
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) AND FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5)the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch as
you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press the clutch
pedal and brake pedal, and shiftto NEUTRAL (N).
NEUTRAL (N): Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
2
4
R
FIRST (1): Press the clutch and shift into FIRST (1).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (I) when you’re goingless
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you’ve cometo a complete
stop and it’s hardto shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL (N) and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Thenshift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal to the floor as
you let up on the accelerator pedal and shift
into
SECOND (2). Then, slowlylet up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
REVERSE (R):To back up, press down theclutch
pedal and shiftinto REVERSE (R). Let up onthe clutch
pedal slowly while pressingthe accelerator pedal.
NOTICE:
Shift to REVERSE (R)only after your vehicleis
stopped. Shifting to REVERSE (R)while your
vehicle is moving could damage your transmission.
L
Also use REVERSE(R), along with the parkingbrake,
for parking your vehicle.
THIRD(3),FOURTH(4),FIFTH(5)AND
6-Speed
1
3
5
This isyour shift pattern.
Here’s how to operate
R your transmission:
SIXTH (6): Shift into THIRD (3), FOURTH (4),
FIFTH ( 5 )AND SIXTH (6) gear the same way youdo
for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal andpress
the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal andbrake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL (N).
2
4
6
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you’re going less
than 20 mph (30 km/h). If you’ve come to a complete
stop and it’s hardto shift into FIRST (l),put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL (N) andlet up on theclutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up on
the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).Then,
slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you pressthe
accelerator pedal.
NEUTRAL (N):Use this position when you start or
idle your engine.
REVERSE (R):To back up, press downthe clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R).Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly whilepressing the accelerator pedal. If you
shift from SIXTH (6) into REVERSE (R), the shift levex
must be first placed in the NEUTRAL (N) position
centered between SECOND (2) and THIRD (3) prior to
shifting into REVERSE (R).
Your six-speed manual transmission hasa feature that
allows you to safely shift into REVERSE (R) while
the vehicle is rolling (at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
If you have turned yourignition off and want to
park your vehicle in REVERSE (R), you will have
to move theshift lever quickly to the right, then
forward into gear.
2-35
Shift Speeds
If your speed drops below
20 mph (32 km/h), or if the
engine is not running smoothly, you should downshift
to
the next lower gear. You may have to downshift twoor
more gears to keep the
engine running smoothlyor for
good performance.
If you skip more than one gear when you
NOTICE:
downshift, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.
And you could injure yourself or others. Don't
shift from SIXTH (6) to THIRD (3), or FIFTH (5)
to SECOND (2) or FOURTH (4) to FIRST (1).
If you skip more than one gear when you
downshift, or if you race the engine when
you downshift, you can damage the clutch
or transmission.
Skip Shift Light (5.7LEngine)
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS, IN MPH (kdh)
1
Engine
Acceleration Shift Speed
1 to2
3800
32-37
L36 -28 21 13-16
(Code K)
(72-75)
(51-59)
(34-35)
(21-25)
210 3
3104
4 lo 5
45-47
St0 6
WA
SKIp SHIFP
This chart shows whento shift to the next higher gear
for best fuel economy.
2-36
When this light comes on,
you can only shift from
mRST (1) to FOURTH (4)
instead of FIRST (1) to
SECOND (2). This helps
you to get the bestpossible
fuel economy.
This light will come on under these conditions:
0
Parking Brake
The engine coolant temperature is greater than
170°F (77"C),
You are going 15 to 20 mph (24 to 32 km/h) and
You are at 35 percent throttle or less.
When this light is on, the gearshift lever will let you
shift from FIRST (1) to FOURTH (4) only. Once you
are in FOURTH (4), you can press the clutch again
and shift into another gear.
Follow the shift speeds onthis chart when theSKIP
SHIFT light is on.
Computer Aided Manual Transmission Shift Speeds:
1st to 4th 15 mph (24 k d h )
4th to 5th 25 mph (40 km/h)*
5th to 6th 49 mph (64 km/h)**
Each time youcome to a stop, the engine's Powertrain
Control Module (PCM) determines whento activate the
SKIP SHIFT upshift system. Use SECOND(2) gear
only when you accelerate very quickly from stop.
a
You can then followthe full gear shift pattern.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down and
pull up on the parking brake lever.If the ignition is on,
the brake system warninglight will come on.
"30 mph (48 km/h)
when accelerating to highway speeds.
""45 mph (72kmk)when acceleratingto highway speeds.
2-37
NOTICE:
Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat.
You may have to
replace them, andyou could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
. -
If you are towing a trailer andare parking on any hill,
see “Towing a Trailer” in theIndex. That section shows
what to do first to keep thetrailer from moving.
To release the parking brake, holdthe brake pedal down.
Pull the parking brakelever up until you can push in the
release button. Holdthe release button in as you move
the brake lever all the
way down.
2-38
Shifting Into PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission Only)
A CAUTION:
It can bedangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the
parking brakefirmly set. Your vehiclecan roll. If
you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly.You or others could beinjured.
To be sure your vehicle won’t move, even when
you’re on fairly level ground, use the steps that
follow. If you’re pulling atrailer, see “Towinga
Trailer” in theIndex.
.,
..
.,.
. .
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your
right foot and
set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position by
holding in the buttonon the lever and push thelever
all the way toward thefront of your vehicle.
3. Move the ignition key to the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key and takeit with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key in your hand, your
vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-39
Leaving Your VehicleWith the Engine
Rum lg (Automatic Transmission Only)
I
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running.Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK(P)
with the parking brake firmly set. And,if you
leave the vehicle withthe engine running, it could
overheat and even catch fire. You or others could
be injured. Don’t leave your vehicle withthe
engine running unless you have to.
2-40
Torque Lock(Automatic Transmission)
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t
shift your
transmission intoPARK (P) properly, the weightof the
vehicle may put too much force
on the parking pawlin
the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull the
shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock,set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the
driver’s seat. To find out how,see “Shifting Into
PARK (P)” inthe Index.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout
of PARK (P)before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need
to have another
vehicle push yours alittle uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,so
you can pull the shift lever out of PARK
(P).
Parking Over Things That Burn
Things that can burn
could touch hot exhaust
parts under yourvehicle and ignite. Don't park
over papers,leaves, dry grass or other things that
can burn.
E--'le E haust
Engine exhaust cankill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide(CO), which you can't see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousnessand death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
0 Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
0 Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
0 Your vehicle was damaged when driving over
high points on the road
or over road debris.
0 Repairs weren't done correctly.
0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaustis coming into
your vehicle:
0 Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
0 Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-41
Running Your Engine While You’re
Parked (Automatic Transmission)
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But
if you
ever have to,here are some things to know.
Idling the engine withthe climate control
system off could allowdangerous exhaust into
your vehicle (seethe earlierCaution under
“Engine Exhaust”).
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle evenif
the fan switch isat the highest setting. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust with
CO can come in easily. NEVER
park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in placecan be a blizzard. (See
“Blizzard” in theIndex.)
--
2-42
--
A -AUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully
in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set.Your vehiclecan roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when
the engine is
running unless you haveto. If you’ve left the
engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or otherscould beinjured. To be sure your
vehicle won’t move, even when you’re fairly
on
level ground, always set your parking brakeand
move the shift lever toPARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See “Shifting Into PARK (P)” in the Index.
If you are parking on a hill and if you’re pulling a
trailer, also see “Towing a Trailer”in the Index.
Limited-Slip Rear Axle
If you have this feature, your limited-slip rear axle can
give you additional tractionon snow, mud, ice, sand or
gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time,
but when one of the rear wheels has no traction and the
other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
Parking Your Vehicle (Manual
Transmission)
Before you getout of your vehicle, put your manual
transmission in REVERSE (R) and firmly apply the
parking brake.
If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P),ease pressure on
the shift lever-- push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) and release the shift lever button as you
maintain brake application. Then press the shift lever
button and move theshift lever into the gear you wish.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P),try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
2. Apply and hold the brake.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear you
want.
If your vehicle is equipped to tow a trailer,see
“Towing a Trailer” inthe Index.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
(Automatic Transmission)
Manual Windows
Your Chevrolet has a Brake-TransmissionShift
Interlock (BTSI). You have to fully apply your regular
brake before you canshift from PARK (P) when the
ignition is in the RUN position. See “Automatic
Transmission Operation’’ in the Index.
Windows
Rotate the window crank handleto open and close each
door window.
2-43
Power Windows
Tilt Steering Wheel
Switches on the driver’sdoor control each window
when the ignition is on orwhen RAP is present. (See
“Retained Accessory Power” in the Index.)
You can open the passenger’s window any amount by
pressing the switch and releasing
it when the window
has lowered to the position you want.
The driver’s window has an auto-downfeature. This
switch is labeled AUTO. Tap the bottom
of the switch
and the driver’s window will open a small amount.
If the
lower partof the switchis pressed all the way down and
released, the window willgo all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, press the top
of the switch. To raise the window, press and hold the
top of the switch.
A tilt steering wheel allows youto adjust the steering
Horn
wheel before you drive.
To sound the horn, presseither horn symbol on your
steering wheel.
You can also raise it to the highest levelto give your
legs more room whenyou exit and enter the vehicle.
If your horn sounds two or three chirps when unlocking
your vehicle with the keyless entry transmitter you
(if
have that option), the alarm was triggered while you
were away. Check the vehicle before entering.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Move the steering wheel
to a comfortable level,
then release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
2-44
f i r n SignaVMultifunction Lever
lbrn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two
downward (for left) positions.These positions allow
you to signal a turn or alane change.
To signal a turn, movethe lever all theway up or
down. When the turnis finished, the lever will
return automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel will flash in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on theleft side of the steering column
includes your:
Turn Signal and Lane Change Indicator
0
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer and
Passing Signal
0
WindshieldWipers
To signal a lane change,just raise or lower thelever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will returnby
itself when you release it.
WindshieldWasher
0
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
2-45
As you signal a turnor a lane change,if the arrows don’t
flash butjust stay on as you signal a turnor lane change,
a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t
see your turn signal.
If a bulbis burned out, replaceit to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’tgo on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse(see “Fuses and Circuit
Breakers” in the Index).
Windshield Wipers
I
1
I
I
i
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
To change the headlamps
from low beamto high or
high to low, pull the turn
signal lever allthe way
toward you. Then releaseit.
You can control the windshield wipersby turning the
band with the wiper symbol onit.
When the high-beams headlampsare on, this light on
the instrument panel also will be on.
For a single wiping cycle, turnthe band to MIST. Hold
it there until the wipers start, then let go.The wipers will
stop after one cycle.If you want more cycles, hold the
band on MIST longer.
You can set the wiper speed
for a long or short delay
between wipes.This can be very useful in light rain
or
snow. Turn the band to choose the delay time.The
closer toLO, the shorter the delay.
2-46
For steady wiping at low speed, turn the band away
from you to the LO position. For high-speed wiping,
turn the band further, to HI. To stop thewipers, move
the band to OFF.
Damaged wiperblades may prevent youfrom seeing
well enough to drivesafely. To avoid damage, be sure to
clear iceand snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If they’re frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear
away snow or iceto prevent an overload.
r
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer until
the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid canform ice on the windshield, blocking
your vision.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can
maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more
without keeping your foot
on the accelerator.
Windshield Washer
There isa paddle with the word PUSH on it at the top
of the turn signal/multifunction lever. To spray washer
fluid on the windshield, just push the paddle. The
washer will continue to spray until you release the
paddle. The wipers will clear the window and wipe a
few more times before stopping or returning to the
previous setting.
a
This can really help on long trips. Cruise control does
not work atspeeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h).
2-47
When you apply yourbrakes, or push the clutch pedal,
if you havea manual transmission, the cruise control
shuts off.
‘A
r
CAUTION:
rn
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
can’t drive safely at a steady speed. So,
don’t use your cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on
slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes
in tiretraction can cause needless wheel
spinning, and you could lose control. Don’t
use cruise control on slippery roads.
If ?oafvehicle isin cruise control when the optional
ASR system beginsto limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. (See “ASR
System’’ inthe Index.) When roadconditions allow
you to safely useit again, you mayturn the cruise
control back on.
2-48
Setting Cruise Control
A
!
If you leaveyour cruise control switch on when
you’re not using cruise, you might
hit a button
and go into cruise when you don’twant to. You
could bestartled andeven lose control. Keep
the
cruise control switch off until you want to useit.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Push in the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
!
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise controlat a desired speed
and then apply the brakeor clutch pedal. This,of course,
shuts off the cruise control. But you don’t need
to reset it.
There are two ways to reduce your speed while using
cruise control:
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruisecontrol switch from ON to
WA (Resume/Accelerate) for about half a second.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
0
0
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher speed.
Push the setbutton at the end of the lever, then
release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold it
there until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the switch. (To increase your speed in
very small amounts, move the switch to WA for
less than half a second and thenrelease it. Each
time you do this, your vehicle will go about
1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
0
Push in the set button at the end of the lever until
you reach the lower speed you want, thenrelease it.
0
To slow down in very small amounts, push the
button for less than half a second. Each time youdo
this, you’ll go 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will slow
down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well yourcruise control will work onhills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may haveto step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have tobrake or shift to a lower gear
to keep your speeddown. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t usecruise control on
steep hills.
2-49
Ending Out of Cruise Control
There are several waysto turn off the cruise control:
Step lightly on the brake pedalor push the clutch
pedal, if you have a manual transmission;or
Move the cruise switch to OFF.
Erasing Speed Memory
The main lamp controlis a knob that works these lamps:
Headlamps
Taillamps
ParkingLamps
LicenseLamps
SidemarkerLamps
When you turnoff the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory iserased.
-‘a-
Exterior Lamps
headlamps and other operating lamps.
InstrumentPanelLights
# , Turn the knob to this position to turn on your
-300: Turn the knobto this position to turn on your
parking lamps and other operating lamps without
your
headlamps.
Turn the knobto OFF to turn off the lamps.
Headlamps On Reminder
If you turn the ignition to the
off position andleave
the lamps on, you will hear a chime, lasting upto
five seconds. If the lamps are still on when you open
the driver’s door, thechime will sound again.
2-50
Daytime Running Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier
for others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the
short periods after dawn and beforesunset.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel
automatically turns the headlamps on, so be sure
it isn’t covered.
The DRL system will make yourfront turn signal
lamps come on when:
When it’s bright enough outside, the regular lamps will
go off, and your front turn signal lamps will come on.
As with anyvehicle, you should turn on theregular
headlamp system when you need it.
Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Use yourfog lamps for
better vision infoggy or
misty conditions. Your
parking lamps mustbe on or
your fog lamps won’t work.
The ignition is on,
0
The headlamp switch is off and
0
The parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your front turn signal lamps
will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps
won’t be on. Your instrument panel won’tbe lit up
either. When you use your turn signals, the frontturn
signal and the taillamp of the desired side will flash.
When it’s dark enough outside, your front turn signal
lamps will go out and your headlamps will come on.
The other lamps will also come on.
#D To turn the fog lamps on, push the fog lamp switch.
Push the the switch again toturn the fog lampsoff. A light
on the switch will come on when the fog lamps are on.
Fog lamps will go off whenever yourhigh-beam
headlamps come on. When the high-beam headlamps
go off, the fog lamps will come on again.
2-51
If your vehicle is equipped with the Vehicle and
Content Theft-DetenentlAlarm System and yourfog
lamp switchis on, the fog lamps may flash, along
with the parking lamps,to indicate operationof the
Vehicle and Content Theft-DetemenVAlarm System.
See ‘Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrendAlarm
System” in the Index.
Interior Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness Control
This switch controls the brightnessof your
instrument panel lights. Turn the switch
to brighten or
dim the lights.If you turn the switch all
the way up,
your courtesy lamps will
come on.
Courtesy Lamps
When either dooris opened, several interior lampsgo
on. These lamps are courtesy lamps. They make
it easier
for you to enter and leave your vehicle.
Courtesy lamps include oneSRV mirror lamp, two
map lamps and other lamps throughout the interior of
your vehicle.
To prevent battery rundown, your interior lamps will
be
disabled about 10 minutes after the ignitionis turned to
the OFF position. The 10-minute timer will be restarted
if you do any of the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Open either door.
3. Press any button on your keyless entry transmitter.
4. Turn the interior lamp switch from off to on.
5. Open the hatch.
2-52
Delayed Illumination
Front Map Lamps
With delayed illumination, the courtesy lamps will come
on and stayon for25 seconds after you close the doors
when entering the vehicle. They will also stay on for
five seconds after you close the doorswhen exiting the
vehicle. The times will be shortened if the ignition is
turned to RUN or if the power locks are activated. To
turn this featureon or off, see “Feature Custornization”
in the Index.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps
will come on when
you remove the key from theignition to help you see
while exiting the vehicle. To turn this feature on or off,
see “Feature Customization” in the Index.
Your inside rearview mirror includes two map lamps.
Each lamp has its own switch. Use the switch closest to
the lamp to turn it on. The lamps will also go on when a
door is opened.
Courtesy lamps include two map lamps and other lamps
throughout the interior of your vehicle.
Retained Accessory Power(RAP)
Mirrors
Your vehicle is equipped witha Retained Accessory
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror
Power (RAP) feature which will allowcertain features
An inside rearview mirroris attached to your windshield.
The mirror has pivots so that you can adjust it.
You can adjustthe mirror for day or night driving. Pull
the tabfor night driving toreduce glare. Push the tabfor
daytime driving.
The power door lock function will work at all times
except during Lockout Prevention (if this
feature is
enabled). See “Lockout Prevention” inthe Index.
2-54
Outside Manual Adjustable Mirror
Adjust the passenger’s sideoutside mirror by hand so
that you can just seethe side of your vehicle when you
are sitting in a comfortable driving position.
Manual Remote Control Mirror
Convex Outside Mirror
Adjust the driver’s side outside mirror with the lever on
the door. Adjust themirror so that you can just seethe
side of your vehicle when youare sitting in a
comfortable driving position.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
Power Remote Control Mirror
(If Equipped)
A CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cuttoo sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Storage Compartments
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. Use your
door key to lock andunlock it.
The power mirror control is on thedriver’s door.
To adjust either mirror, turn the switch to left (L) or
right (R). Then use the control to adjust the mirror.
Front Console
Close-Out Panel
To use the storage area, push inon the side of
the console.
The close-out panel canbe closed for hidden storage in
the rear area of your vehicle. It can also help reduce
noise in the vehicle when placed in the upright position,
closing out the rear end area.
C isette a
~
-- -
zompact Disc Storage
Eou have a storage area for cassette tapes and compact
discs (if you have this option) in your console.
2-56
Removing the Close-Out Panel
I
1. Close the panel. If the close-out panel is not closed
and resting on the trim panel, it cannot be removed.
2. Pull the panel toward youto unsnap it. Then slide the
close-out panel along the groove in the trim panel.
Reverse the steps to install the panel.
An improperly stored close-out panel could be
thrown about thevehicle during a collision or
sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store it
outside your vehicle. When youput itback,
always besure that it
is securely reattached.
_T
and Lighter
Lift up thecover to open the ashtray. To remove it,
lift up on the right side of the ashtray. If you have an
automatic transmission, the ashtray is near the front of
your console. If you have a manual transmission, the
ashtray is near your cupholder.
I NOTICE:
When carrying large or heavy items, it is a good idea to
open the panel and place the items in the rear area.
Don’t put papers and other thingsthat burn into
your ashtrays.If you do, cigarettesor other smoking
materials couldset them onfire, causing damage.
2-57
To use the lighter, pushit in all the way andlet go.
When it’s ready,it will pop backby itself.
~~
Accessory Plug
~
NOTICE:
I
I
I
1
Don’t hold a cigarette lighter in with yourhand
while it is heating. If you do, it won’t be able to
back away fromthe heating element when it’s
ready. That canmake it overheat, damaging the
lighter and the heating element.
If you plug accessories into your cigarette lighter, such
as heating devicesor air compressors, these accessories
should havea rated current of less than 15 amps.
Exceeding this limit will result in a blown fuse.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors. YQU
can also swing them tothe side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull down the sun visor andlift the cover to expose the
vanity mirror.
2-58
This plug is located inside the front section aheadof
the shift lever in the console. The plug can be usedto
connect electrical equipment such asa cellular phone or
CB radio. Be sure to follow the installation instructions
included withthe equipment.
NOTICE:
When usingthe accessory plug:
0 The maximum loadof any electrical
equipment should not exceedthree amps.
Be sure to turn off any electrical equipment
when not in use. Leavingelectrical
equipment on for extended periods can
drain your battery.
We recommend that you see
a qualified technicianor
your dealer for the proper installation
of your equipment.
Floor Mats
Your vehicle’s floor mats are custom-fitted to the foot
wells. Be sure the driver’s floormat is in place. If it
isn’t, it could interfere with the accelerator or brake
pedals.
\
Twin Lift-off Roof Panels
(If Equipped)
If you havethis option, you can removeone or both
lift-off roof panels.
‘A
CA1 rI0
Don’t try to remove the T-top panels while the
vehicle is moving. Trying
to remove a T-top panel
while the vehicle is moving couldcause an
accident. The panel could fall into the vehicle and
cause you to lose control, or it could fly off and
strike anothervehicle. You or others could be
injured. Remove a T-toppanel only whenthe
vehicle is parked.
I
The door key unlocks the panels. Turn the key to
the left
to unlock the panel.
2-59
If a T-top panel is not
stored properly, it could be
thrown about the vehicle in a crashor sudden
maneuver. People in the vehicle could beinjured.
Whenever you store a T-top panelin the vehicle,
always besure that itis stored securely inthe
proper storage slot at the rear of the vehicle.
Then pull on the release handle to unlatch the panel. Lift
the outer edge of the panel andpull it toward you. Then
carry the panel to the rear
of the vehicle for storage.
2-60
Open the close-out panel completely. Place the panel in
the correct slot (driver's or passenger's) in the rear area
of your vehicle. Makesure the handle is open and facing
you when you put it in the storage slot.
Push the handle closed to secure the panel in the slot. To
lock each panel inthe storage area, use your door key.
-
A CAUl
r
-
I
An improperly installed I' rop panel may fall
into orfly off the vehicle. You or others could be
panel, always
injured. After installing T-Top
a
check that itis firmly attachedby pushing up on
the underside of the panel.
2-61
Reverse the steps
to remove the T-top panels from
storage.
3
When installing the panelsto the roof, keep the
outboard edge of the panel raised aboutthree inches
above the roof while placing the inboard
edge of the
panel under the center roof.
2-62
After the inboard edge of the panel is in position under
the center roofrail, lower the outboard edge
of the
panel into position, close the latch
and lock the T-top.
NOTICE:
T-Top Sunshades
Do not attempt toinstall the panels by sliding
them horizontally toward thecenter roof rail.
Doing so may cause the weatherstrips to be
aligned improperly, which mayresult in leaks
and possible damage to the weatherstrips.
I NOTICE:
High pressure car washes may causewater to
enter your vehicle. Never spray waterdirectly at
the roof panel joints. This will cause leaks.
1. Start with the panel marked DRIVER FRONT.
Unlatch the driver’s side T-top, raise it halfway
and close the latch handle.
2. With the top raised and restingon the center roof
rail, slide the flat edge of the sunshade panel (with
the vinyl sideto the glass) between theglass and
plastic trim, making sure theedge marked DRIVER
FRONT is pointing to the front of the vehicle.
2-63
L
I
3. Open the latch and close the T-top. Check to see if
there are any gaps showing, Unlatch the T-top and
adjust the sunshade as required.
5. Pull the sunshade back a little and remove the backing
paper from the Velcro buttons. Push the sunshade
back into place, sticking the Velcro to the glass.
4. Once the sunshade is installed properly, you can
stick the [email protected] buttons onthe glass fora proper fit
every time you install the sunshades. To do this, first
remove the T-top with the sunshade installed and
place it upside downon a table or bench. Take care
not to scratch the glass.
6. Install the T-top, close the latch and lock the
T-top. Repeat the above stepsfor the passenger’s
side sunshade.
1-64
Convertible Top
The following procedures explain the proper operation
of your convertibletop.
Lowering Your ConvertibleTop
NOTICE:
Don’t leave your convertible out with the top
down for any long periodsof time. The sun and
the rain can damage your seat material and other
things inside your vehicle.
You can store the sunshades two different ways:
When the T-tops are in use, store the sunshades in
their storage area in therear of the vehicle, and
make sure the close-out panelis in its closed,
upright position.
1. It is recommended that you park on a level surface.
Set the parking brake firmly.Shift an automatic
transmission into PARK (P) or a manual
transmission into REVERSE (R). The ignition
must be in ACC or RUN. Lower both sun visors.
When you have the T-tops off and in their storage
slots, store the sunshades on the T-tops, intheir
installed position.
I NOTICE:
It is not recommended thatyou raise or lower the
top while the vehicle is moving.
2-65
I NOTICE:
~~
~
~
Don't lower the top if it is damp or wet. When
the top is down, trapped water can cause stains,
mildew and damage to the inside of your vehicle.
Be sure to dry
off the top before you lower it.
I NOTICE:
It is not recommendedto lower the top if the
vehicle is out incold weather,0°F (-18OC) or
lower, or you maydamage top components.
NOTICE:
..
'i
Before loweringthe convertible top into the
storage area, be sure there are no objects inthe
way of the folded, stored top. The weight of a
stored top on items in the storage areawill cause
the convertible top back glassto break.
2-66
.
--
I
2. Unlock the front of the convertible topby pushing
on the smaller partof the latch, then pulling down
on the largerpart of the latch. Besure the hook
on the latch that attaches
into the hole at the
windshield releases.
3. Make sure there is
nothing or anyone on
or around the top. Push
and hold down or the
downarrowon
the
convertible top switch.
Installing the Boot Cover
After lowering the convertible top, you’ll want toinstall
the boot cover.The three-piece boot cover is stored in a
bag in the hatch
4. The switch is next to your cigarette lighter. The top
will automatically lower into the storage area.
1. Open the hatch and removethe two side covers
from the storage bag.
2. Install the two side covers by engaging the tab
into the front seatbelt cover. Lower the covers
onto the vehicle.
2-67
Raising Your Convertible Top
I
I
~
3. Install the middle section of the cover by sliding the
tabs into the slots on the right side cover. Lowerthe
cover and engagethe latch.
4. Close the hatch.
2-68
1. It is recommended that you park on a level surface.
Set the parking brake firmly.If you have an
automatic transmission,shift into PARK (P). If
you have a manual transmission, shift into
REVERSE (R). The ignition mustbein ACC,
RUN or RAP must be on. Then lower both sun
visors and lower both windows
at least threeinches
(8 cm). If the boot cover is inplace, it must be
removed first.
1 NOTICE:
It is not recommended that
you raise or lower the
top while the vehicleis moving.
2. Open the hatch. Remove the middle pieceof the cover
3. Remove the two side pieces of the boot cover
by pushing in on the latch and lifting up on the cover.
by lifting the rear cover and sliding them out of
their slots.
2-69
5. Push and hold the up
arrow A on the
convertible top switch.
4. Store each piece of the cover in its separate
compartment in the storage bag, store the bag in
the hatchand close the hatch.
2-70
6. Pull down on the latches and align the hooks with
the holes. Push forward onthe larger part of the latch
until it clicks. Do not force the latch. If it ishard to
lock, the topis not properly aligned.
If your vehiclesuffers a power loss, such as a dead
battery, you can stillraise the top manually byrotating
the valve in the left side of thehatch.
Open the hatch andfind the tab along the left side trim
panel. Lift up the tab and turn the valveto the left to
release the hydraulic pressure. Turn the ignition key to
the LOCK position. You can now raise or lower yourtop
manually. Be sure to close the valveafter installing your
top so you can raise or lower it electrically later.
2-71
L
2-72
A. Air Vents
J. Parking Brake Lever
B. Main Light Control
K. Storage Console
C. Instrument Cluster
L. Shift Lever
D. Fog Lamp Switch (If Equipped)
M. Convertible Top Switch (If Equipped)
N. Rear Window Defogger Switch
0. Horn
E. Acceleration Slip Regulation (ASR) Switch (V8) or
Second Gear Start Switch (V6 Automatic)
E Audio System
G. Comfort Controls
P. Remote Hatch Release
H. Glove Box
I. Cupholders
R. Ashtray
Q. Cigarette Lighter
S. Accessory Power Outlet
2-73
Instrument Panel Cluster
AIR
BAG
5.7L V8 Engine shown, 3800 V6 Engine similar
-
Your instrument clusteris designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicleis running. You'll know howfast
you're going, your engine's rpms, about how much
fuel you haveleft and many otherthings you'll need to know to
drive safely and economically.
2-74
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in bothmiles
per hour (mph) andkilometers per hour (km/h). Your
odometer shows how far your vehicle has been driven,
in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers
(used in Canada).
You may wonderwhat happens if your vehicle needs
a new odometer installed. If possible, the new one has
to be set to the same reading the old one had. If it
can’t be, then it’s set at zero, but a label on the driver’s
door must show the old reading and when the new one
was installed.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you howfar your car has been
driven since you last set the trip odometer to zero.
To set the trip odometer to zero, press the knob on the
instrument panel cluster.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in thousands
of revolutions per minute (rpm).
I NOTICE:
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer in
the red area, or engine damage may occur.
Warning Lights, Gages
and Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomesserious enough to cause an
expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages couldalso save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may beor is a
problem with one of your vehicle’sfunctions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you knowthey’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or
is a problem
with one of your vehicle’sfunctions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on andstays
on when you aredriving, or when one of the gages
shows there may bea problem, check the sectionthat
tells you what todo about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly -- and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warninglights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turnedto RUN or START, a chime
will come on for about eight seconds to remind people
to fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for about 70 seconds. If
the driver’s belt is already
buckled, neither thechime
nor the light will come on.
2-76
Air Bag ReadinessLight
There is an air bag readinesslight on the instrument
panel, which showsAIR BAG. The system checksthe
air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system
check includes theair bag sensors, the air bag modules,
the wiring and thecrash sensing and diagnostic module.
For more information on the air bag
system, see “Air
Bag” in the Index.
AIR
BAG
This light will come on
when you start your engine,
and it will flash for a few
seconds. Then the light
should go out. This means
the system is ready.
If the air bag readinesslight stays on after you start the
engine or comes on when you are driving, yourair bag
system may not work properly.Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when youturn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Voltmeter
8
You can read battery
voltage on your voltmeter.
If it reads less than 11 volts
or more than 16 volts while
your engine is running,
and it stays there,
may
you
have a problem with the
electrical charging system.
If you must drivea short distance with the voltmeter
reading in a warning zone, turnoff all your accessories,
including your air conditioning system and audio system.
Brake System WarningLight
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, theother part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on, there could bea brake
problem. Have yourbrake system inspected right away.
Have it checked right away. Driving with the voltmeter
reading in awarning zone could drain your battery.
If you idle your engine for awhile, the voltmeter
reading might move into the low voltage zone (indicated
by red dots). If the reading stays in the low voltage zone
while you are driving, you may have a problem with the
electrical charging system. Have it checked. While the
voltmeter reads inthe low voltage zone, your battery
may not beable to power certain electrical accessories,
like ABS. (If this happens, your ABS INOP light will
come on. See “Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light”
in this section.)
BRAKE
This light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN.
If it doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
If the light comes on whileyou are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the floor.
It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. (See “Towing Your Vehicle’’
in the Index.)
2-77
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light
Your brake system may not be working properly
if the brake system warning light
is on. Driving
with the brake system warning light on can lead
to an accident. If the lightis still on after you’ve
pulled off the road and stopped carefully, have
the vehicle towed for service.
When the ignitionis on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The
light will stay onif your parking brake doesn’t release
fully. If it stays on after your parking brake
is fully
released, it means you have a brake problem.
ABS
INOP
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will
come on when you start
your engine andit will
stay on for three seconds.
That’s normal.
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignitionoff. Or, if the light comes on and stays
on
when you’re driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start
the engine again to reset the
system. If the light still stays on,or comes on again
while you’re driving, your vehicle needs service.
If the
light is on and the regular brake system warning light
isn’t on, you still have brakes, but you don’t have
anti-lock brakes. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The anti-lock brake system warning light should come
on briefly when you turn
the ignition key to RUN. If the
light doesn’tcome on then, haveit fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there is a problem.
2-78
ASR (Acceleration Slip Regulation) System
Warning Light (Option)
ASR
OFF
This warning light should
come on briefly as,you start
the engine. If the warning
light doesn’t come on then,
have it fixed so it will be
ready to warn you if there’s
a problem.
Low Traction Light
LOW
TRAC
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
this light willcome on.
If it stays on, or comes on when you’re driving, there
may be a problem with yourASR system and your
vehicle may need service.When this warning light is
on, the system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your
driving accordingly.
If you have theASR system, thislight will also come on
when the systemis limiting wheel spin.You may feel or
hear the system working, but thisis normal. Slippery
road conditions may existif the low traction light comes
on, so adjust your driving accordingly.The light will
stay on for a few seconds after the ASR system stops
limiting wheel spin.
The ASR system warning light willcome on if you turn
the system off by pressing the ASR switch located on
the instrument panel and the warning light will
come on
and stay on. To turn
the system back on, press the switch
again. The warning light should go off. (See “ASR
System” in the Indexfor more information.)
The low traction lightalso comes on briefly when you
turn the ignition keyto RUN. If the light doesn’tcome
on then, have it fixed so it will be there to tell you when
the anti-lock brake systemor ASR system is active.
If the ASR system warning lightcomes on and stays on
for an extended period of time when the system
is
turned on, your vehicle needs service.
2-79
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
This gage showsthe engine
coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer movesinto
the red area, yourengine
is approaching an
overheating condition.
Your vehicle is equipped with a low coolant indicator
that is designed to detect when thecoolant level drops
below the set limit.If the lowcoolant level sensor (on
the radiator) detects that the level drops while theengine
is running, the low coolant indicator will light and
remain lit for five minutes or until the ignition switch
is turned to OFF. Check the coolant level and add
coolant as needed.
The low coolant light might stay onafter filling the
radiator. Turnthe ignition switch to theOW position,
then restartthe engine to verifythat the low coolant
light goes out. See “Engine Coolant” in the Index.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
driving conditions, you should pulloff the road, stop
your vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
In “Problems onthe Road” this section shows what to
do. See “Engine Overheating,’’ in the Index.
Low Coolant Light( 5.7L V8 Engine)
This warning light should
come on briefly while you
are starting your engine. If
the light doesn’t come on,
have it remired.
.2-80
I
NOTICE:
Driving with the low coolant light on could
cause your vehicle to overheat. See “Engine
Overheating’’ in the Index. Your vehicle could
be damaged, and it wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(Service Engine Soon Light)
I
I Your vehicle is equipped
SERVICE
ENGINE
SOON
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD I1 (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The SERVICE ENGINE SOON light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and service
is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated by
the system before any problem is apparent. This may
prevent more serious damage to your vehicle. This
system is alsodesigned to assist your service technician
in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
NOTICE:
If you keep driving your vehicle with this light
on, aftera while, your emission controls may not
work as well, your fuel economy may not beas
good and your engine may not run
as smoothly.
This could lead to costly repairs that may not be
covered by your warranty.
This light should come on, asa check to show you itis
working, when the ignition is on andthe engine is not
running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it repaired.
This light will also come on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
Light Flashing -- A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions and
may damage the emission control system on your
vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service maybe required.
Light On Steady -- An emission control system
malfunction has beendetected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis and
service may be required.
2-81
If the LightIs Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
0 Reducing vehicle speed.
0
Avoiding hard accelerations.
0
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
0
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount ofcargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe todo so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart the
engine. If the light remains on steady, see “Ifthe Light
Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to your
dealer or qualified service center for service.
2-82
If the LightIs On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently putfuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall
the cap.The diagnostic system can determineif the fuel
cap has been leftoff or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with thecap properly
installed should turn the light off.
Did youjust drive througha deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system maybe wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the
electrical system
light off.
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
Are you low onfuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine may
not run as efficiently as designed since small amountsof
air are sucked into thefuel line causing a misfire. The
system candetect this. Adding fuel should correct this
condition. Make sure to install the fuel cap properly. It
will take a few driving trips toturn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel (see
“Fuel” in the Index).Poor fuel quality will cause your
engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You may
notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when you
put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the light
to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuelbrand you use.It will require at least one
full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check the
vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may havedeveloped.
Engine Oil Pressure Gage
\*0
/
80
\
/
5.7L VS Engine
\!
0
/
0
120
3800 V6 Engine
This gage tells you if there could be a problem with your
engine oil pressure.
The engine oil pressure gage showsthe engine oil
pressure in psi (pounds persquare inch) in the U.S.,
or kPa (kilopascals) in Canada, whenthe engine is
running. Oil pressure should be 20 to 80 psi (140 to
550 kPa). On the 3800 engine, the oil pressure
should be between20 and 120 psi (140 to 827 Wa).
2-83
It may vary withengine speed, outside temperature and
oil viscosity, but readings above the red
area show the
normal operating range. Readings in
the red areatell
you that the engine is low on oil, or that you might have
some otheroil problem. See “Engine Oil” in the Index.
Don’t keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become
so hot that it
catches fire.You or others could beburned.
Check your oilas soon as possible and have your
vehicle serviced.
NOTICE:
Damage to your enginefrom neglected oil
problems can be costlyand is not covered by
your warranty.
2-84
Low Oil Light
LOW OIL
This warning light should
come on whileyou are
starting your engine. If
the light doesn’t come on,
have it repaired.
I
If the light stays on afterstarting your engine, your
engine oil level may be too low.You may need to add
oil. See “Engine Oil’’ in the Index.
NOTICE:
The oil level monitoring system only checks
the
oil level when you
are startingyour engine.It
does not keepmonitoring the level oncethe
engine is running. Also,
the oil level check only
works whenthe engine has been turned off long
enough for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Check Gages Light
CHECK
GAGES
This warning light will
come on briefly when you
are starting the engine.
If the lightcomes on and stays on while you are driving,
check your gages to see if they are in the warning areas.
When the gage pointer first indicates empty (E) you still
have a little fuel left(about one to two gallons) (3.8 to
7.6 litres), but you need to get more fuel right away.
Here are four concerns some owners have hadabout the
fuel gage. All these situations are normal and do not
indicate that anything is wrong withthe fuelgage.
0
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before the
gage reads full (F).
0
It takes more (or less) gas to fill up than the gage
reads. For example, the gage reads half full, but it
took more (or less) than half of the tank’s capacity to
fill it.
0
The gage moves a little when you turn, stop or
speed up.
0
When you turn the engine off, the gage doesn’t go
back to empty (E).
Fuel Gage
Your fuel gage shows about
how much fuel is inyour
tank. The fuel gage works
only when the ignition is
in the RUN.
2-85
,@bNOTES
2-86
0Section 3
Comfort Controls and Audio Systems
In this section, you’ll find out how to operate the comfort control and audio systems offered with your vehicle. Be
sure to read about the particular systems supplied withyour vehicle.
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-7
Comfort Controls
Air Conditioning
Heating
Ventilation System
Defogging and Defrosting
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
Setting the Clock for Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Setting the Clock for Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette
Tape Player
3-9
3- 14
3-18
3-2 1
3-23
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-25
3-25
AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player and
Automatic Tone Control (If Equipped)
Trunk Mounted CD Changer (If Equipped)
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
Understanding Radio Reception
Tips About Your Audio System
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
Care of Your Compact Discs
Care of Your Compact DiscPlayer
Fixed Mast Antenna
3-1
Comfort Controls
Temperature Control Knob
l
Turn the knobto change the temperature of the air
flowing from the heating system. Turn
it toward the red
or to the right (clockwise)for warmer air and toward the
blue or tothe left (counterclockwise)for cooler air. The
temperature of theair cannot be less than the
temperature of the outside air.
h
l
i
Air Control Knob
OFF: The system is off.
2 VENT Air flows through the upperair vents.
With this system, youcan control the heating and
ventilation in your vehicle.If you have theair
conditioning option, youcan also control cooling.
Your vehicle also has the flow-through ventilation
system describedlater in this section.
Fan Control Knob
# FAN: Turn this knob to select the force of air
you want.
3-2
BI-LEVEL: Air is directed through the upperair
vents and the heater ducts.
’!!
‘!A
HEATER: This setting directs most of the air
through the heater ducts and someof the air through the
windshield defroster vents.
9 BLEND: Air is directed through the windshield
defroster vents and the heaterducts.
9DEFROST This setting directs most of theair
through the windshielddefroster vents and someof the
air through the heaterducts.
Air Conditioning
A/C: Use for normal cooling on hot days. This
setting cools outside air and directs it through the
upper air vents.
The air conditioner compressor operates in MAX, N C ,
BI-LEVEL, BLEND and DEFROST when the outside
temperature is above freezing. When the air conditioner
is on,you may sometimes notice slight changes in your
vehicle’s engine speed and power.This is normal,
because the compressor uses power andthe system is
designed to cycle the compressor on andoff to keep the
desired cooling and help fuel economy.
Cooling
The air conditioning system uses the same controls as
the heating system, except that the air control knob has
two extra settings, described below.
The air conditioner works best if you keep your
windows closed. On very hot
days, open the windows
just long enough for thehot air to escape.
MAX: Provides maximum cooling or quick cool-down
1. Turn the air control knob to A/C for normal cooling.
For faster cooling move the knob toMAX.
on very hot days. This setting recirculates most of the air
inside your vehicle. If it is used for long periodsof time,
the air may become dry. This setting directs air through
the upper air vents.
2. Turn the temperature control knob to a
comfortable setting.
3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.
3-3
Heating
Ventilation System
The heater works bestif you keep your windows closed
while using it.
1. Turn the air control knob to HEATER.
2. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.
3. Turn the temperature control knob to a
comfortable setting.
If your vehicle is equipped with an optional engine coolant
heater, you can use it in cold weather (around20°F/-8“C
or lower) to improve heater performance on initialstart up.
Because an engine coolant heater warms the engine
coolant, your vehicles heating system can more quickly
Adjust the direction of airflow by moving the louvered vents.
and efficiently provide heat for your vehicle’s passenger
Your vehicle’s flow-through ventilation system supplies
area. See “Engine Coolant Heater” in the Index.
outside air into the vehicle when it is moving. Outside
air
will also enter the vehicle when the blowerfan is running.
Bi-Level Heating
For mild outside temperatures when little heating or
You may want to use bi-level heatingon cool, but sunny
days. This setting directs cool air toward your body and cooling is needed, you canstill direct outside air through
your vehicle.
warmer air toward yourfeet.
1. Turn the air control knob to VENT.
1. Turn the air control knob toBI-LEVEL.
2. Turn the temperature control knob to a
2. Turn the temperature control knob to a
comfortable setting.
comfortable setting.
3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.
3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.
Ventilation Tips
0
Keep the hood and front air inlet free of ice, snow, or
any other obstruction (such as leaves). Theheater
and defroster will work far better, reducing the
chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
0
When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan control knob to the right for afew moments
before driving off. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your windows.
0
Keep the air path underthe front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
Defogging and Defrosting
1. Turn the air control knob to DEFROST.
2. Turn the temperature control knob to the
desired setting.
Rear Window Defogger (If Equipped)
The rear window defogger
uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the
rear window.
Press the switchto turn on the defogger. An indicator
light will come on to remind you that the defogger is on,.
The defogger will turn off automaticallyafter about ten
minutes of use. If you turn it onagain, the defogger will
operate for about five minutes only.You can also turn
the defogger off by pressing the switch again. The
indicator light will go off when the system is shut off.
3. Turn the fan control knob to the desired speed.
The side window defogging works equally as well inthe
HEATER, BLEND andDEFROST modes.
3-5
Do not attach anythinglike a temporary vehiclelicense
or a decal across the defogger grid on the rear window.
NOTICE:
Don’t use a razor blade
or something else sharp
on the insideof the rear window.If you do, you
could cut or damage the warming grid, and the
repairs wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Audio Systems
Your Delco Electronics audio system has been designed
to operate easily and give yearsof listening pleasure.
You will get the most enjoyment out of it if you acquaint
yourself with it first. Find out what your Delco
Electronics system cando and how to operate all its
controls, to be sure you’regetting the most out of the
advanced engineeringthat went into it.
3-6
If you have power door locks, your vehicle hasa feature
called Retained Accessory Power(RAP). With RAP,
you can play youraudio system evenafter the ignition is
off. See “Retained Accessory Power”in the Index.
Setting the Clockfor Systems without
Automatic Tone Control
Press SET. SET will appear on the display for five
seconds. Within five seconds, press and hold the right
arrow on the SEEK button until thecorrect minute
appears. Press and hold theleft arrow on theSEEK
button until thecorrect hour appears.
Setting the Clockfor Systems with
Automatic Tone Control
Press and holdHR until the correct hour appears. Press
and hold MN until thecorrect minute appears.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
I
Finding a Station
AM-FM: Press the lower knob to switch between AM,
FMl and FM2. The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Turn the lower knobto choose radio stations.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station and stay there.
PUSHBUTTONS: The four numbered pushbuttons let
you return to your favorite stations. You can set up to
21 stations (seven A M , seven FM1, and sevenFM2 ). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
Playing the Radio
3. Tune in the desired station.
VOLUME: This knob turns the system on and off and
controls the volume. To increase volume and turn the
radio on, turn the knob to the right. Turn it tothe left to
decrease volume.
RECALL: Display the time with the ignition off by
pressing the RECALL knob. When the radio is playing,
press this button to recall the station frequency.
4. Press SET. (SET will appear on the display.)
5. Press and holdone of the four numbered buttons,
within five seconds. The sound will mute. When it
returns, release the button. Whenever you press that
numbered button, the station you set will return.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-7
In addition to the four stations already set, up to three
more stations may be preset oneach band by pressing
two adjoining buttonsat the same time. Just:
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Press SET.
(SET
will appear on the display.)
3. Press any two adjoining pushbuttons at the same time,
within five seconds. The sound will mute. When it
returns, release the buttons. Whenever you press
the
BAL: Turn the control behind the upper knobto move
the sound to the left or right speakers.The middle
position balancesthe sound betweenthe speakers.
FADE: Turn the control behind the lower knobto move
the sound tothe front or rear speakers.The middle
position balancesthe sound betweenthe speakers.
Playing a CassetteTape
Your tape playeris built to work best with tapes thatare
4. Repeat the steps for each pair of pushbuttons.
30 to 45 minutes long oneach side. Tapes longer than
that areso thin they may not work well this
in player.
P.SCAN: Press both SEEK arrows and P.SCAN will
appear on the display. UsePSCAN to listen to eachof
If you hear nothingor hear just a garbled sound,it may
your preset stations fora few seconds. The radio will go to not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove
the tape and
the frst preset station stored on your pushbuttons, stop for start over.
a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
(If a
While the tapeis playing, usethe VOL, FADE, BAL,
preset station has weak reception, will
it not stop.) Press
BASS and TREB controlsjust as you do for the radio.
either SEEK arrow or the upper knob to stop scanning.
Other controls may have different
functions when a tape
is inserted. The display will showan arrow to show
Setting the Tone
which side of the tape is playing.
BASS: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
decrease bass.
REV: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the
left and
the tape will reverse rapidly until you press
this button
TREB: Slide the lever up or down to increase or
again lightly.
decrease treble. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
same buttons, the station you set will return.
,
Adjusting the Speakers
FWD: Press the SEEK arrow pointing to the right and
the tape will rapidly advance until you pressthis button
again lightly.
AM-FM Stereo with CassetteTape Player
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped)
RECALL: Press this knob to hear the other side of a
tape that is playing.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the tape. The radio
will play. If you leave a cassette tape in theplayer while
listening to the radio, it may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See“Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold EJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display --- to
show the indicator was reset.
Included with the AM-FM Stereo with Cassette Tape
Player and Automatic Tone Control are eight high
performance speakers and an eight channel amplifier.
See your dealerfor details.
3-9
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM,
FM1
and FM2.The display shows your selection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
choose radio stations. Push the knob back
into its stored
position when you’re not using it.
it to the left to decrease volume. The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,
the clock will show for a few seconds.
SCW Your system has a featurecalled
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjustsautomatically to make up for road
and wind noise as youdrive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move thecontrol ring behindthe upper
knob to the right to adjust theSCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automaticallyincreases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always soundthe same to you as you drive.
If you don’t want to useSCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch on the control ring allows for
more volume compensationat faster vehicle speeds.
3-10
SEEK: Press the rightor left arrow to go to the next
higher or lower station. The sound will mute while
seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN will appear in the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for afew seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for a few seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press SEEK againto stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttonslet
you return to your favorite stations. You can set upto
18 stations (six AM, six FM1 and sixFM2).Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the typeof station selected.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered buttons. The
sound will mute. When it returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selected for that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
P.SCAN: Press this button to listen to each of your
favorite stations stored on your pushbuttons for afew
seconds. The radio will scanthrough each of the stations
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with
weak reception. The AUTO TONE setting stored for
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons again to stop
scanning. P.SCAN willbe displayed whenever the tuner
is in the P.SCAN mode. The channel number (P 1-P6)
will appear momentarily just before the frequency is
displayed. In FM mode, this function will scan through
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations and €341 or FM2 will
appear on the display.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase bass and to the left to
decrease bass. When you usethis control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to increase treble and to the left to
decrease treble. When you usethis control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switch to manual and the
AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a station is weak
or noisy, you may wantto decrease the treble.
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
AUTO TONE: This feature allows you to choose preset
bass and treble equalization settings designed for
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop andjazz
stations. C/W will appear on the display when you first
press AUTO TONE. Each time you press it, another
setting will appear on the display. Press it again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display willgo
blank. Tone control will return tothe BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use the BASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONSto program
AUTO TONE.
3-11
Adjusting the Speakers
BAL: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the rightfor the right speakers and to the left
for
the left speakers.The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.
FADE: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the right to adjust
the sound to the front
speakers and to the left
for the rear speakers.The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a CassetteTape
Your tape playeris built to work best with tapes thatare
30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes longer than
that are so thin they may not work well in this player. If
a tape is inserted when the ignitionis on but the radio is
off, the tape will begin playing.
A tape symbol is shown
in the center of the graphic display whenever a tape
is
inserted. When a tapeis active, the tape symbol will be
accompanied by a direction arrow.
While the tapeis playing, use theVOL, AUTO TONE,
BAL, FADE, BASS and TREB controlsjust as you do
for the radio. Other controls may have different
€unctions when a tape is inserted. The display will show
the tape symbol and an arrow
to show which side ofthe
tape is playing.
If you hear nothingor hear just a garbled sound,it may
not be in squarely. Press EJECT to remove the tape and
start over.
The player is able to detect a tight or broken tape, and
will eject the tape. The radio will
go back to playing the
last station selected.
The player automatically senses the cassette
for metal or
Cr02 and sets the pre-emphasis. Anytime a tapeis
inserted, the top sideis selected to play first.
PREV (1): Press this button or the left
SEEK arrow to
go to the previous selection onthe tape if the current
selection has been playingfor less than eight seconds. If
the PREV buttonis pressed and the current selection has
been playingfor more than eight seconds,it will go to
the beginningof the current selection.Your tape must
have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for PREVor SEEK to work. The tape direction
arrow blinks during PREVor SEEK operation.The
sound will mute during PREVor SEEK operation. Press
this button orone of the SEEK arrows againtQ return to
normal play.
PROG (2): Press this button to play the other side of
the tape.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next selection on the tape. If you hold the
button or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving forward through the tape. Your tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between each
selection for NEXT or SEEK to work. The tape
direction arrow blinks during NEXT or SEEK operation.
The sound will mute during NEXT or SEEK operation.
Press this button or one of the SEEK arrows again to
return to normal play.
REV (4): Press this button to reverse the tape rapidly.
Press it again to return to playing speed. The radio will
play the last-selected station while the tape reverses.
00 (5): Press this button to reduce background
noise. Note that the double-D symbol will appear on
the display.
Dolby Noise Reduction is manufactured under a license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation.
FWD (6): Press this button to advance quickly to
another part of the tape. Press the button again to return
to playing speed. The radio will play thelast-selected
station while the tape advances.
AM-FM: Press this button to play the radio when a tape
is in the player.
TAPE AUX: Press this button to change to the tape
function when the radio is on. The tape symbol with an
arrow will appear on the display when the tape is active.
If your system is equipped with a remote playback
device, pressing this button a second time will allow the
remote device to play.
EJECT Press this button to removethe tape. The radio
will play. EJECT may be activated with either the
ignition or radio off. Cassettes may be loaded withthe
radio off if this button is pressed first. If you leave a
cassette tape in the player while listening to the radio, it
may become warm.
CLN: If this message appears on the display,the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See “Care of
Your Cassette Tape Player” in the Index. After you clean
the player, press and hold
EJECT for fiveseconds to
reset the CLN indicator. The radio will display--- to
show the indicator was reset.
3-13
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to usea CD adapter kit with your cassette
tape player after activating the bypass feature on your
tape player.
To activate the bypass feature, use the following steps:
AM-FM Stereo with Compact Disc Player
and AutomaticTone Control (If Equipped)
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX buttonfor five
seconds. The tape symbol onthe display willflash
for two seconds,indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter while the tape symbol is flashing.
It will power upthe radio and begin playing.
This override routine will remain active until EJECT
is pressed.
3-14
Included with the AM-FMStereo with Compact Disc
Player and Automatic Tone
Control are eight high
performance speakers andan eight channel amplifier.
See your dealerfor details.
Playing the Radio
Finding a Station
PWR-VOL: Press this knob to turn the system on and
off. To increase volume, turn the knob to the right. Turn
it to the left to decrease volume. The knob is capable of
rotating continuously.
AM-FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
and FM2. The display shows yourselection.
TUNE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn it to
RECALL: Press this button to recall the station being
played. If you press the button when the ignition is off,
the clock will show for afew seconds.
SCV: Your system has a featurecalled
Speed-Compensated-Volume (SCV). With SCV, your
audio system adjusts automatically to make upfor road
and wind noise as you drive. Set the volume at the
desired level. Move the control ring behind the upper
knob to the right to adjust the SCV. Then, as you drive,
SCV automatically increases the volume, as necessary,
to overcome noise at any particular speed. The volume
level should always sound the sameto you as you drive.
If you don’t want to use SCV, turn the control all the
way down. Each notch onthe control ring allows for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
choose radio stations. Push the knob back into itsstored
position when you’re not usingit.
SEEK: Press the right or left arrow to go to the next
lower station. The sound will mute while seeking.
SCAN: Press one of the SEEK arrows for two seconds,
and SCAN willappear on the display. Use SCAN to
listen to stations for afew seconds. The radio will go to
a station, stop for afew seconds, then go on to the next
station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning. The sound
will mute while scanning.
PUSHBUTTONS: The six numbered pushbuttons let
you return to yourfavorite stations. You can set up to
18 stations (six AM, sixFMl and six FM2). Just:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM-FM to select the band.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to select the equalization that
best suits the type of station selected.
3-15
5. Press and holdone of the six numbered buttons.The
sound will mute. Whenit returns, release the button.
Whenever you press that numbered button, the
station you set will return and the AUTO TONE
equalization that you selected will also be
automatically selectedfor that button.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone
BASS: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turn the
knob to the rightto increase bass andto the left to
decrease bass. When you use this control, the radio’s
AUTO TONE setting will switchto manual and the
AUTO TONE display will go blank.
TREB: Press this knob lightlyso it extends. Turnthe
knob to the rightto increase treble and to the left
to
P.SCAN: Press this buttonto listen to each of your
decrease treble. When you use
this control, the radio’s
favorite stations storedon your pushbuttons for a few
seconds. The radio will scan through each of the stations AUTO TONE setting will switchto manual and the
stored on your pushbuttons, except those stations with AUTO TONE display willgo blank. If a station is
weak or noisy, you may wantto decrease the treble.
weak reception.The AUTO TONE setting storedfor
that pushbutton will be automatically chosen. Press
Push these knobs back into their stored positions when
P.SCAN or one of the pushbuttons againto stop
you’re not using them.
scanning. P.SCAN will be displayed whenever the tuner
AUTO TONE: This feature allows youto choose
is in the P.SCAN mode.The channel number (Pl-PB)
preset bass and treble equalization settings designed
for
will appear momentarilyjust before the frequency is
country/western, classical, news, rock, pop and
jazz
displayed. InFM mode, this function will scan through
stations.
CNV
will
appear
on
the
display
when
you
first
both FM1 and FM2 preset stations andFM1 or FM2 will
press AUTO TONE. Each time you pressit, another
appear on the display.
setting will appearon the display. Pressit again after
JAZZ appears and the AUTO TONE display will go
blank. Tone control will return
to the BASS and TREB
knobs. Also, if you use theBASS and TREB knobs,
control will return to them and the AUTO TONE
display will go blank. Use PUSHBUTTONS
to program
AUTO TONE.
Adjusting the Speakers
It is dirty, scratched or wet.
BAL: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn the
knob to the right for theright speakers andto the left for
the left speakers. The middle position balances the
sound between the speakers.
It is very humid. (If so, wait about an hour and
try again.)
FADE: Press this knob lightly so it extends. Turn me
knob to the rightto adjust the sound to the front
speakers and to the left for the rear speakers. The middle
position balances the sound between the speakers.
Push these knobs backinto their stored positions when
you’re not using them.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in. The disc should begin playing.The
display will showCD and the CD symbol. If you want
to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first press
RECALL or EJECT.
If you’re driving on a very rough road
or if it’s very hot,
the disc may not play and ERR(error) may appear on
the display. PressRECALL to take ERR off the display.
When things get back to normal, the disc should play.If
the disc comes out, it could be that:
0
The disc is upside down.
PREV (1): Press this buttonor the left SEEK arrow to
go to the previous track if the current
selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds. If the PREV button
is pressed and the currentselection has been playing for
more than eight seconds, it will go to the beginning of
the current selection. If you hold the buttonor press it
more than once, the player will continue moving back
through the disc. The sound willmute while seeking.
RDM (2): Press this button to hear the tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will showon
the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play.
RDM is reset to off when thedisc is ejected.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the right SEEK arrow to
go to the next track.If you hold the button or press it
more than once, the player will continue moving
forward through thedisc. The sound will mute while
seeking.
REV (4): Press and holdthis button to quickly reverse
within a track. Release itto play the passage.You can
use the counter reading on the display to locate a
passage more easily.
3-17
FWD (6): Press and holdthis button to advance
quickly withina track. Release it to resume playing.You
can use the counter reading onthe display to locate a
passage easily.
RECALL: Press this button to see which track is
playing. Pressit again withinfive seconds to see how
long it has been playing(elapsed time). The track
number also appears when youchange the volume or
when a new trackstarts to play.
AM-FM: Press this button to play
the radio whena disc
is in the player.The letters CD will go off the display.
CD AUX:Press this button to change to the disc
function when the radio is on. A CD icon willappear on
the display whenthe disc is inthe player, whetherit is
active or not. If your systemis equipped witha remote
playback device, pressing this button a second time will
allow the remote device to play.
EJECT: Press this button to remove the disc. The radio
will play. The disc will start at the first track when you
reinsert it.
3-18
If you turn off the ignition or radio with
a disc in the
player, it will stay in the player. When youturn on the
ignition or system, the disc willstart playing where it was
stopped. If you press EJECT but don’t remove the disc,
the player will pull the disc back
in to protect it after about
one minute.If you leave a compact discin the player
while listening to the radio, it may become warm.
Trunk Mounted CD Changer(If Equipped)
With the optional compact disc changer, you can play up
to 12 discs continuously. Normalsize discs may be
played using the trays supplied the
in magazine. The
small discs (8 cm) canbe played only with specially
designed trays.
I NOTICE:
Place large objects in the trunk appropriately
so
that they will not come into contact with the
CD changer.
A
Once youhave loaded the discs in the magazine, slide
open the door of the compactdisc (CD) changer. Push
of the
the magazine into the changer in the direction
arrow markedon top of the magazine.
Close the door by slidingit all the way to the left.If the
door is left partially open, the changer will not operate
and an error will occur. When the door
is closed, the
changer will begin checkingfor discs in the magazine.
T h s will continue for up to two minutes depending
on
the numberof discs loaded.
To eject the magazinefrom the player, slide theCD
changer door all the way open. The magazine will
automatically eject. Rememberto keep the door closed
whenever possibleto keep dirt and dustfrom getting
You must first load the magazine with discs before you inside the changer.
can play a compact disc. Eachof the 12 trays holds one
Whenever aCD magazine with discs is loaded
in the
disc. Press the button on the back
of the magazine and
changer, the CD symbol will appear
on the radio display.
pull gently onone of the trays. Load the trays from
If the CD changer is checking the magazinefor CDs, the
bottom to top, placing a disc
on the tray label side down.
CD symbol will flashon the display until the changer
is
If you load adisc label side up, thedisc will not play
ready to play. When aCD begins playing, adisc and
and an error will occur. Gently push the tray back
into
track number will be displayed.
The disc numbers are
the magazine slot. Repeat this procedure
for loading up
listed on the frontof the magazine.
to 12 discs in the magazine.
All of theCD functions are controlled by the radio
buttons, except for ejecting the CD magazine.
3-19
PREV (1): Press this button or the SEEK left arrow to
go to the previous track if the current selection has been
playing for less than eight seconds.If the PREV button
is pressed and the current
selection has been playingfor
more than eight seconds, it willgo to the beginningof
the current selection. If you hold or press this button
more than once, the player willcontinue moving back
through the disc. The sound will mute while
seeking.
PROG (2): Press this button toselect a disc. The disc
number and track number will be displayed.
NEXT (3): Press this button or the SEEK right arrow to
go to the next track.If you hold the button or press it more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the disc. The soundwill mute while seeking.
REV (4): Press and hold this button
to reverse quickly
through a track selection. Release it to resume playing.
FWD (6): Press and holdthis button to advance quickly
through a track selection. Releaseit to resume playing.
SEEK: Press the right arrowto seek to the next
selection onthe CD. Pressthe left arrow tosearch for
the previous selection on theCD. The sound will mute
while seeking.
P.SCAN: Press this button to hearthe tracks in random,
rather than sequential, order. RANDOM will appear on
the display. PressP.SCAN again to turn off random play.
TAPE AUX:Press this button if you have a disc loaded
in the changer and the radiois turned on, to play a
compact disc. Press AM-FM to return tothe radio when
a compact disc is playing. Press TAPE
AUX to switch
between the tape and compactdisc if both are loaded.
To eject the disc holder in the trunk mountedCD
changer, slide the CD changer door all theway open and
the disc holder will automaticallyeject.
Compact Disc Changer Errors
If an error occurs while tryingto play a CD in the
compact disc changer, the following conditions may
have causedthe error:
0
0
0
0
0
The road is too rough. The disc should play when the
road is smoother.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or loaded label side up.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
The CD changer dooris open. Completely close the
changer door to restore normal operation.
An empty magazine is inserted in the CD changer.
Try the magazine again witha disc loadedon one of
the trays.
If any error occurs repeatedlyor if an error cannot be
corrected, please contact your dealer.
Theft-Deterrent Feature (If Equipped)
[email protected] designed to discourage theft of your
radio. It works by using a secret code to disable all radio
functions whenever battery poweris removed. Your
audio system is equipped with THEFTLOCK if
THEFTLOCK is displayed on the front of the radio.
The THEFTLOCK feature forthe radio may be usedor
ignored. If ignored, the system plays normally and the
radio is not protected by the feature. If THEFTLOCK is
activated, your radio will not operate if stolen.
When THEFTLOCK is activated, the radio will display
LOC to indicate a locked condition anytime battery
power has been interrupted. If your battery loses power
for any reason, you must unlock the radio with the secret
code before it willoperate.
Activating the Theft-Deterrent Feature
The instructions which follow explain how to enter your
secret code to activate the THEFTLOCK system. It is
recommended that you read through all ninesteps
before starting the procedure.
NOTE: If you allow more than 15 seconds to elapse
between any steps, the radio automatically reverts to
time and you muststart the procedure over at Step 4.
1. Write down any three or four-digit number from
000 to 1999 and keep it in a safe place separate from
the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
3. Turn the radio off.
4. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until --- shows on the display. Next you will usethe
secret code number which you have written down.
5. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
6. Press MN again to make thelast two digits agree
with yourcode.
7. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
8. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show REPto let you knowthat you
need to repeat Steps 5 through 7 to confirm your
secret code.
9. Press AM-FM and this time the display will show
SEC to let you know that yourradio is secure. The
indicator by the volume control will beginflashing
when the ignition is turned off.
3-21
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
Unlocking the Theft-Deterrent Feature After a
Power Loss
2. Turn the radio off.
Enter your secretcode as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
3. Press the 1 and 4 buttons together. Hold them down
until SEC shows on the display.
1. LOC appears when the ignition is on.
4. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
2. Press MN and 000 will appear on the display.
3. Press MN again to make the last two digits agree
with your code.
4. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
5. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches thesecret code you have written down.
The display will showSEC, indicating the radio is
now operable and secure.
If you enter the wrong code eight times, INOP will
appear on the display.You will have to wait an hour
with the ignition on before youcan try again. When you
try again, you will only havethree chances to enter the
correct code before INOP appears.
If you lose or forget your code, contact your dealer.
Disabling the Theft-Deterrent Feature
Enter your secret code as follows; pause no more than
15 seconds between steps:
5 . Press MN again to makethe last two digits agree
with your code.
6. Press HR to make the first one or two digits agree
with your code.
7. Press AM-FM after you have confirmed that the
code matches the secret code you have written down.
The display will show---,indicating that theradio is
no longer secured.
If the code entered is incorrect, SEC will appear onthe
display. The radio will remainsecured until thecorrect
code is entered.
When battery poweris removed and later appliedto a
secured radio, the radio won’t turn on and LOC will
appear on the display.
To unlock a secured radio,see “Unlocking the
Theft-Deterrent Feature After a Power Loss” earlier in
this section.
Understanding Radio Reception
To help avoid hearing loss or damage:
AM
0
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever getit.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give you the best sound, butFM signals
will reach only about10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to come and go.
Tips About Your Audio System
Hearing damage from loud noiseis almost undetectable
until it is too late. Your hearing can adaptto higher
volumes of sound. Soundthat seems normal can be loud
and harmfulto your hearing. Take precautions by
adjusting the volume control on your radioto a safe
sound level before your hearing adapts
to it.
Adjust the volume control to the lowest setting.
Increase volume slowly until you hear comfortably
and clearly.
NOTICE:
Before you add any sound equipment to your
vehicle like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone or two-way radio be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very
important to do it properly. Added sound
equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, Delco Electronics
radio or
other systems, and even damage them.Your
vehicle’s systems mayinterfere with the
operation of sound equipment that has been
added improperly.
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
your dealer and be sure to checkFederal rules
covering mobileradio andtelephone units.
--
--
3-23
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player thatis not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes
or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from Contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat.If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure
of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLN
to indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
If this
message appears on the display, your cassette tape
player needs to be cleaned. It will
still play tapes, but
you should cleanit as soonas possible to prevent
damage to your tapes and player. If you notice a
reduction in sound quality, try a known good cassette
to see if it is the tape or the tape player
at fault. If this
other cassette hasno improvement in sound quality,
clean the tape player.
The recommended cleaning method
for your cassette
tape playeris the use of a scrubbing action,
non-abrasive cleaning cassette with pads which scrub
the tape head as the hubs
of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available
through your dealership(GM Part No. 12344789).
3-24
When using a scrubbing action, non-abrasive cleaning
cassette, it is normal for the cassetteto eject because
your unit is equipped with a cut tape detection feature
and a cleaning cassette may appear as a broken tape.
To prevent the cleaning cassette from being ejected,
use the following steps.
If your vehicle is equipped with
the AM-FM Stereo
with Cassette Tape Player:
1. Turn the ignitionto RUN or ACC.
2. Turn the radioon.
3. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
4. Within five seconds, press and hold the
REV and
FWD buttons at the same timefor three seconds.
The tape symbol on the display will flash showing
that thecut tape detection feature is no longer active.
the manufacturer’s
5 . Eject the cleaning cassette after
recommended cleaning time.
If your vehicleis equipped with the AM-FM Stereo with
Cassette Tape Player and Automatic Tone Control:
1. Turn the ignition to RUN or ACC.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE AUX buttonfor five
seconds. The tape symbol on the display willflash
for two seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette while
the tape symbol is flashing.
5 . Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer's
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected, the cut tape
detection feature is active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabricbelt to clean
the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may
not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry'type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After you clean the player, press and holdEJECT for
five seconds to reset the CLN indicator. The radio will
display --- to show the indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your Compact Discs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen a
clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution and
clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface when handling
discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole andthe outer edge.
Care of Your Compact Disc Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with
lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand mostcar washes
without beingdamaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, you can straighten it outby hand. If the
mast is badly bent, as it might beby vandals, you should
replace it.
Check every once in a while to be sure the mast is still
tightened to the rear quarter panel.
3-25
b
3-26
NOTES
0Section 4
Your Driving and the Road
Here you’ll find information about driving on different kinds of roads and in varying weather
conditions. We’ve also
included many other useful tips on driving.
4-2
4-2
4- 5
4- 6
4- 10
4- 12
4-13
4- 14
4-15
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
Control of a Vehicle
Braking
Steering
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Loss of Control
Driving at Night
4- 17
4- 19
4-20
4-2 1
4-22
4-23
4-24
4-28
4-30
Driving in Rain and onWet Roads
City Driving
Freeway Driving
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Highway Hypnosis
Hill andMountain Roads
Winter Driving
Loading Your Vehicle
Towing a Trailer
4-1
Assume that pedestriansor other driversare going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might
do. Be ready for their mistakes.
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable
of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough
following distance. It’s the best defensive driving
maneuver, in both city and rural driving.
You never
know when the vehicle in front
of you is going to brake
or turn suddenly.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to the
highway death toll, claiming thousands
of victims
every year.
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyonecan give about drivingis:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device
in your
Chevrolet: Buckle up. (See “Safety Belts” in the Index.)
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roadsor freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
4-2
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs
to drive
a vehicle:
Judgment
a MuscularCoordination
0
Vision
Attentiveness.
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was drinking
and driving. In recent years,over 17,000 annual motor
vehicle-related deaths have been associated with the use
of alcohol, with more than300,000 people injured.
Many adults -- by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population -- choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under
21, it’s
against the law in everyU.S. state to drink alcohol,
There are good medical, psychologicaland
developmental reasons for these laws.
The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol.
According to the American Medical Association, a
180-lb. (82 kg) person who drinks three 12-ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with
a
BAC of about0.06 percent. The person would reachthe
same BAC by drinking three 4-ounce(120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinksif each had 1- 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
The obvious way to solve this highway safety problem
is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive.But
what if people do? How muchis “too much’’ if the
driver plans to drive? It’s a lot less than many might
think. Although it depends on each person and situation,
here is some general information onthe problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration(BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends uponfour things:
0
The amount of alcohol consumed
0
The drinker’s body weight
The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
4-3
0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All
It’s the amountof alcohol that counts. For example,
if
drivers are impaired at BAClevels above 0.05 percent.
the same person drankthree double martinis (3 ounces
Statistics show that the chanceof being in acollision
or 90 ml of liquor each) withinan hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person who
increases sharply fordrivers who have a BAC of
consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a 0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled hisor her chance of having a
somewhat lower BAC level.
collision. At a BAC level of
0.10 percent, the chanceof
There is a genderdifference, too. Women generally have
this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
a lower relative percentage of body water than men.
level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!
Since alcohol is carried in body water, this means that a
The body takes about an hour
to rid itself of the alcohol
woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a
man of her same body weight when each has the same in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I’ll
be careful” isn’t the
number of drinks.
right answer. Whatif there’s an emergency, a need
to
The law in manyU.S. states sets the legal limit at a BAC
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
of 0.10 percent. In a growing numberof U.S. states, and
A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able
throughout Canada, the limit is 0.08 percent. In some
to react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
other countries, it’s even lower.The BAC limit for all
There’s somethingelse about drinking and driving that
commercial drivers in the UnitedStates is 0.04 percent.
many people don’t know. Medical research shows that
The BAC willbe over 0.10 percent after three to six
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
drinks (in one hour).Of course, as we’ve seen, it
worse, especially injuriesto the brain, spinal cord or
depends on how much alcohol
is in the drinks, and how
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
quickly the person drinks them.
drinking -- driver or passenger -- is in acrash, that
But the abilityto drive is affected well below a BAC
of
person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled
0.10 percent. Research shows that the drivingskills of
is higher thanif the person had not been drinking.
many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
4-4
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness and
judgment canbe affected by even
a small amount
of alcohol. You can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive afterdrinking.
Please don’tdrink and drive
or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride homein a cab; or if
you’re with a group, designate adriver who will
not drink.
--
--
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehiclego where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. Allthree systems have to do their work
at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice, it’s
easy to ask moreof those control systems thanthe tires
and road canprovide. That means you canlose control
of your vehicle.
4-5
Braking
Braking action involvesperception time and
reaction time.
First, you haveto decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 314 of a second. But
that’s only an average.It might be less withone driver
and as long as two
or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part.So do alcohol, drugs and
frustration. But even in3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so
keeping enough space between your vehicle and others
is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surfaceof the road (whether it’s pavementor
gravel); the condition of the road (wet,dry, icy); tire
tread; the condition of your brakes;the weight of the
vehicle and the amountof brake force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking.Some people drive in
spurts -- heavy acceleration followed by heavy
This is a
braking -- rather than keeping pace with traffic.
mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool between
hard stops.Your brakes will wearout much fasterif you
do a lotof heavy braking.If you keep pace with the
traffic and allow realistic following distances, you will
eliminate alot of unnecessary braking. That means
better braking and longer brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake
normally but don’t pump your brakes.
If you do, the
pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist. But
you will useit when you brake. Once the power assist
is
used up, it may take longerto stop and the brake pedal
will be harder to push.
Anti-Lock Brakes (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes (ABS).ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.You
may hear a momentary motoror clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even noticethat your
brake pedal movesor pulses a little. This is normal.
ABS
INOP
If there’s a problem withthe
anti-lock brake system, this
warning light will stay on.
See “Anti-Lock Brake
System Warning Light” in
the Index.
Here’s how anti-lock works. Let’s say the roadis wet.
You’re driving safely. Suddenly an animaljumps out in
front of you.
You slam on the brakes. Here’s what happens with ABS.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one
of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will
separately work the brakesat each front wheel and at
both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions.
Remember: Anti-lockdoesn’t change the time you need
to get yourfoot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance.If you get tooclose to the vehicle in
front of you, you won’thave time to apply your brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slowsor stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to
stop, even though youhave
anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pumpthe brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly andlet anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or
notice some noise, but
this is normal.
’
LOW TRAC
J
You can steer around the obstacle while brakinghard.
As you brake, your computerkeeps receiving updates on
wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly.
4-8
When your anti-lock system
is adjusting brake pressure
to help avoid a braking skid,
this light will come on.See
“Low Traction Light” in
the Index.
ASR (Acceleration Slip Regulation) System
(Option: V8 Engine)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system called
ASR that limits wheel spin. This isespecially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if it
senses thatone orboth of the rear wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens, the
system works the rear brakes and reduces engine power
(by closing the throttleand managing engine spark) to
limit wheel spin.
This light will come on
when your ASRsystem is
limiting wheel spin. See
“Low TractionLight” in the
Index. You may feel or hear
the system working, but this
is normal.
The ASR system may operate on dry roads under some
conditions, and you maynotice a reduction in
acceleration when this happens. This is normal and
doesn’t mean there’sa problem with your vehicle.
Examples of these conditions include a hard acceleration
in a turn, oran abruptupshift or downshift.
If your vehicle is in cruisecontrol when the ASR system
begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise control will
automatically disengage. When roadconditions allow
you to safely use it again, you may re-engage the cruise
control. (See “Cruise Control” in the Index.)
ASR
OFF
When the system is on,this
warning light will come on
to let you know if there’s a
problem with yourASR
system. See “ASR System
Warning Light” in
the Index.
When this warninglight is on, the system will notlimit
wheel spin.Adjust your driving accordingly.
The ASR system automatically comes on whenever you
start your vehicle. To limit wheel spin, especially in
slippery road conditions, you should alwaysleave the
system on.But you can turn the ASR system offif you
ever need to. (You should turn the system off if your
vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow. See
“Rocking Your Vehicle’’in the Index.)
4-9
1
To turn the system off,
press the ASR switch
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the systemis not functioning, you can steer but
it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s importantto take curvesat a reasonable speed.
The ASR system warning light in the cluster will
come
on and stay on. The light on the switch willgo out. If the
ASR system is limiting wheel spin when you press the
switch, the warning light will
come on -- but the system
won’t turn off right away.It will wait until there’s no
longer a current needto limit wheel spin.
You can turn the system backon at any time by pressing
the switch again.The ASR system warning light should
go off.
Braking in Emergencies
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on
the news happenon curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driveror beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The
traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it
possible for the vehicleto change its path when you turn
the front wheels.If there’s no traction, inertia will keep
the vehicle going in the
same direction. If you’ve ever
tried to steer a vehicle on wetice, you’ll understand this.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires andthe road surface,the angle at
With anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the same
time. In many emergencies, steering can help you more which the curveis banked, and your speed. While
you’re in a curve, speedis the one factor you
than even the very best braking.
can control.
4-10
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems -- steering and acceleration -- have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding the
sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. Refer to “ASR’ in
the Index.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on the
accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you want it
to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds are
based on good weather and road conditions. Under less
favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as youapproach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking -- if you can stop in
time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room. That’s
the time for evasive action -- steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well inemergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.(See “Braking in
Emergencies” earlier in this section.) It is better to
remove as much speed as youcan from a possible
collision. Then steer around the problem, to the left or
right depending on the space available.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into thestraightaway.
4-11
Off-Road Recovery
You may ftnd thatyour right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to actfast, steer quickly, and
just asquickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergencysituations are always
possible is a good reason to practicedefensive driving at
all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
If the level of the shoulder is only slightlybelow the
pavement, recovery shouldbe fairly easy. Easeoff the
so
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer
that your vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. You
can turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn until the
right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then
turn your
steering wheel to go straight down the roadway.
Passing
The driverof a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just theright moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then goes
back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, ora brief surrender to frustration or anger can
suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents -- the head-on collision.
So here aresome tips for passing:
“Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides and to
crossroads for situations that might affect your passing
patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever about
making a successful pass, wait fora better time.
Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and lines.
If you can see a sign up ahead that might indicate a
turn or an intersection, delay your pass. A broken
center lineusually indicates it’s all right to pass
(providing the road ahead is clear). Never cross a
solid line on your side of the lane or a double
solid line, even if the road seems empty of
approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass
while you’re awaiting an opportunity. For one thing,
following too closely reduces your area of vision,
especially if you’re following a larger vehicle. Also,
you won’t have adequate space if the vehicle
ahead suddenly slows or stops. Keep backa
reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay inthe right lane and don’t
get too close. Time your moveso you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into the
other lane. Ifthe way is clear to pass, you will have a
“running start” that more than makes upfor the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your pass,
you need only slow down anddrop back again and
wait for another opportunity.
If other cars are lined up to pass a slow vehicle, wait
your turn. But take care that someone isn’t trying to
pass you as you pull out to pass the slow vehicle.
Remember to glance over yourshoulder and check
the blind spot.
4-13
0
0
0
0
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When youare far enough
ahead of the passed vehicleto see itsfront in your
inside mirror, activate your right lanechange signal
and move backinto the right lane. (Remember that
your right outside mirror is convex. The vehicle you
just passed may seem tobe farther away from you
than it really is.)
Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passingthe
next vehicle.
Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it may
be slowing downor starting to turn.
If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get aheadof you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let’s review whatdriving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems (brakes, steering
and acceleration) don’t have enough friction where the
tires meet the road to do whatthe driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up.Keep trying to steer and
constantly seek an escape routeor area of less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid mostskids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not
“overdriving” those conditions. But skids are
always possible.
The three typesof skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. Inthe steering or cornering skid, too
much speedor steering ina curve causes tires to slip and
lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes thedriving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handledby easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the ASR system, remember: It helps avoid
only the accelerationskid.
If you do not have ASR, or if the system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled byeasing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, easeyour foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you wantthe
vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough, your
vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready for a
second skid if it occurs.
Driving at Night
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It isimportant to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a lower
gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide.
You may not realize the surfaceis slippery until your
vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues -- such as enough water, ice or packed snow on
the road to make a “mirrored surface” -- and slow down
when you have anydoubt.
Remember: Any anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired -- by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
4-15
Here are some tips on night driving.
0
Drive defensively.
0
Don’t drink and drive.
0
Adjust your inside rearview mirrorto reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
0
Since you can’t see as well, you may needto
slow down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
0
Slow down, especially on higher speedroads. Your
headlamps canlight up only so much road ahead.
0
In remote areas, watch for animals.
0
If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
Night Vision
No one can see as well at nightas in the daytime. But as
we getolder these differencesincrease. A 50-year-old
driver may require at least twice as much lightto see the
same thing at night as
a 20-year-old.
What youdo in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will
have less trouble adjusting to night. Butif you’re
4-16
driving, don’t wearsunglasses at night. They maycut
down on glare from headlamps, but theyalso make a lot
of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark. Whenyou
are faced with severe glare (as from a driver who
doesn’t lower the high beams,or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps), slowdown a little. Avoid staring
directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all theglass on your vehicle
clean -- inside and out.Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass
can build upa film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupilsof your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps
light up far less of a
roadway when you are ina turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; thatway, it’s easier to pickout dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps shouldbe
checked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness -- the inability to see in dim light -- and aren’t
even awareof it.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Rainandwetroads can meandrivingtrouble. On awet
road, you can’t stop, accelerateor turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’thave much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise go
to slower and be
cautious if rain startsto fall while you are driving. The
surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes are
tuned for drivingon dry pavement.
The heavier the rain, the harderit is to see. Evenif your
windshield wiper bladesare in good shape,a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road and even
people walking.
b
1
I
It’s wise tokeep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape andkeep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber startto
separate from the inserts.
4-17
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t work
as well in a quick stop and may cause pulling to
one side.You could lose controlof the vehicle.
of water or
After driving through a large puddle
a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly until
your brakes work normally.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride onthe water.
This can happen if the road is wet enough andyou’re
going fast enough. When your vehicleis hydroplaning,
it has little or no contact with the road.
Driving toofast through large water puddles or even
going through somecar washes cancause problems, too.
The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. Butit can if your
tires do not have muchtread or if the pressure inone or
But if you can’t, try to slow downbefore you hit them.
more is low,It can happenif a lot of water is standing on
the road,If you can see reflections from trees, telephone
poles or other vehicles, and raindrops “dimple”the
water’s surface, there could be hydroplaning.
4-18
Hydroplaning usually happensat higher speeds. There
just isn’t a hard andfast rule about hydroplaning.The
best advice is to slow down whenit is raining.
City Driving
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
NOTICE:
If you drive too quicklythrough deep puddles or
standing water, water can come in through your
engine’s air intake andbadly damage your
engine. Never drive through water thatis slightly
lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If you
can’t avoid deeppuddles or standingwater, drive
through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
0
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. Andbe especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more
clear room
ahead, and be preparedto have your view restricted
by road spray.
0
Have good tires with proper tread depth.(See
“Tires” inthe Index.)
One of the biggest problems with city streets
is the
out for
amount of traffic on them. You’ll want to watch
what the other driversare doing and pay attentionto
traffic signals.
4-19
Here are ways to increase your safetyin city driving:
0
Know the best wayto get to where youare going.
Get acity map and plan yourtrip into an unknown
part of the city just as you wouldfor a
cross-country trip.
0
Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross most
large cities. You’ll save time and energy. (See the
next part, “Freeway Driving.”)
0
Treat a greenlight as a warning signal.A traffic light
is there because the corneris busy enough to need it.
When a light turns green, and
just before you start to
move, check both waysfor vehicles that have not
cleared the intersection or may
be running the
red light.
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (alsocalled thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the safest
of allroads. But they havetheir own special rules.
The most important adviceon freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keepto the right. Drive at the same
speed most of the otherdrivers are driving. Too-fastor
too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow. Treat the
left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance,there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should beginto
check traffic. Tryto determine where you expectto
blend with the flow.Try to merge into the gap at close to
the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn
signal, check
your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as often
as
necessary. Tryto blend smoothly with the trafficflow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailingrate if it’s slower. Stay
in the right lane unless you want topass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave thelane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make surethere isn’t another vehiclein your
“blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to move
slightly slower at night.
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimesquite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not
to your sense of motion. After driving
for any distance
at higher speeds, you may tend
to think you are going
slower than you actuallyare.
Before Leaving on a LongTrip
Make sure you’re ready. Tryto be well rested.If you
must start when you’re notfresh -- such as after a day’s
work -- don’t planto make too many miles that
first part
of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes you
can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle readyfor a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready
to go. If it needs
service, haveit done before starting out.Of course,
you’ll find experienced and able serviceexperts in
Chevrolet dealerships all across North America. They’ll
be ready and willingto help if you need it.
When you wantto leave the freeway, moveto the proper
lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not,
under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to
the next exit.
4-21
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
Highway Hypnosis
a Windshield WasherFluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
all windows cleaninside and outside?
Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
a Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
Lumps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
a Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflatedto the
recommended pressure?
e Weather Forecasts:What’s the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your
trip a short
time to avoid a major storm system?
a Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the
hum of the tires on the
road, the droneof the engine, and the rush
of the wind
against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Don’t
let it
happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can leave the
road in less than a second, and you could crash and
be injured.
What can youdo about highway hypnosis? First,be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
Make sure your vehicleis well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and to
the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
If you get sleepy, pulloff the road into a rest, service
or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or
both. For safety, treat drowsiness on the highway as
an emergency.
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more
enjoyable.
0
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check allfluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system and
transmission. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of the
slowing down.Shift to a lower gear when yougo
down a steep or long hill.
A CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
-
I
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could so
get
hot that they wouldn’t work well.
You would then
have poor brakingor even none going downa
hill. You could crash. Shift down to let your
engine assist your brakeson a steep
downhill slope.
4-23
Winter Driving
Coasting downhillin NEUTRAL (N)or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Yourbrakes will haveto
do all the work of slowing down. They could get
so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going down
a hill. You couldcrash. Always haveyour engine
running and your vehicle in gear when you
go downhill.
0
0
0
0
Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hillsor mountains. Don’t swing wideor cut
across the center of the road. Driveat speeds that let
Here are some tips for winter driving:
you stay in your own lane.
Have your vehicle in good shapefor winter.
As you go over the top
of a hill, be alert. There could
be
something in your lane, like a stalled car or an accident. You may want to put winter emergency suppliesin
your vehicle.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn of
special problems. Examples are long grades, passing or
no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area or winding roads.
Be alert to these and take appropriate action.
4-24
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet the
road probablyhave good traction.
However, if there is snow orice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You’ll
have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need
to be
very careful.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush
or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth and a
couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you will
be driving under severe conditions, include a small bag
of sand, a pieceof old carpet or a coupleof burlap bags
to help provide traction.Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
4-25
What’s the worst timefor this? “Wet ice.” Very cold
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet
ice can be even more trouble becauseit may offer the
least traction of all.You can get wetice when it’s about
freezing (32” F; 0 O C ) and freezing rain begins to
fall.
Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition-- smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow -- drive with caution.
If you haveASR, keep the system on. It will improve
your abilityto accelerate when drivingon a slippery
road. Even though your vehicle has the ASR system,
you’ll wantto slow down andadjust your drivingto the
road conditions. See “ASR System’’ in the Index.
If you don’t have the ASR system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break thefragile traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
4-26
Your anti-lock brakes improve your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hardstop on a slippery road. Even
though you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry
pavement. See “Anti-Lock” in the Index.
0
Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appearin
shaded areas where the suncan’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildingsor under bridges.
Sometimes the surfaceof a curveor an overpass may
remain icy when the surrounding roadsare clear. If
you see a patch ofice ahead of you, brake beforeyou
are on it. Try notto brake while you’reactually on
the ice, and avoid suddensteering maneuvers.
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
Tie a red cloth to your vehicleto alert police that
you’ve been stoppedby the snow.
Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blanketsor extra clothing, make body
insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags, floor
mats -- anything you can wrap around yourselfor
tuck under your clothingto keep warm.
If you are stopped by heavy snow, youcould be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you knowfor sure that you are near help
and you can hike through the snow. Hereare some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and your
passengers safe:
0 Turn on your hazard flashers.
You can run the engine to keep warm, butbe careful.
4-27
a CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your vehicle.
This can cause deadlyCO (carbon monoxide) gas
to get inside.CO could overcome youand kill
you. You can’t seeit orsmell it, so you might not
know it is inyour vehicle. Clear away snowfrom
around the base of your vehicle, especiallyany
that is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure snow
doesn’t collectthere.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s awayfrom the wind. This will help
keep CO out.
Run your engine onlyas long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you runthe engine, makeit go a little faster
than just idle. That is, push the accelerator slightly. This
uses less fuel for the heat thatyou get and it keeps the
battery charged. You will need a well-charged batteryto
restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on
with your headlamps. Letthe heater runfor a while.
4-28
Then, shut the engineoff and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat.Start the engine again
and repeat thisonly when you feel really uncomfortable
from the cold. Butdo it as little as possible. Preserve the
fuel as long as you can. To help keep warm, youcan get
out of the vehicle and
do some fairly vigorous exercises
every half houror so until help comes.
Loading Your Ve’ kle
TIRE-LOADING INFORMATION
OCCUPANTS
VEHICLE CAP. WT.
FRT, CTR. RR.
TOTAL LBS.
KG
MAX. LOADING & GVWR SAME AS VEHICLE
CAPACITY
WEIGHT
XXX
COLD
TIRE
SPEED
PRESSURE
TIRE SIZE
RTG
PSPKPa
FRT.
RR.
SPA.
IF TIRES ARE HOT, ADD 4PSli28KPa
SEE OWNER’S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
.
Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it
may properly carry. The Tire-Loading Information label
found on the rear edge of the driver’s door tells you the
proper size, speed rating and recommended inflation
pressures for the tires on your vehicle. It also gives you
important information about the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and thetotal weight that you can
carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight
and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo and all
nonfactory-installed options.
The other label, is the Certification label, found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. It tells you the gross
weight capacity of your vehicle, called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle WeightRating). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for eitherthe front or
rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it
out. Don’t carry more than100 lbs. (45 kg) in your
rear area.
I
MFD BY GENERAL MOTORS CORP
DATE GVWR GAWR FRT GAWR
~d
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE U.S. FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE
SAFETY, BUMPER, AND THEFT PREVENTION
STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF
MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front
or rear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, or it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose control.
Also, overloading can shorten the life
of
your vehicle.
4-29
If you put things inside your vehicle
-- like suitcases,
tools, packagesor anything else-- they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have
to stop or turn quickly, or
if there is a crash, they’ll keep going.
Towinp a Trailer
-
CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strikeand
injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in
a crash.
0 Put things inthe rear area
of your vehicle.
Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them are
above the tops of the seats.
Don’t leave an unsecured child restraint in
your vehicle.
When you carry something insidethe
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
Don’t leave aseat folded down unless you
need to.
4-30
If you don’t usethe correct equipment and drive
properly, you can lose control when you pulla
trailer. For example, if the trailer is too heavy,the
brakes may not work well or even at all. You
and your passengers could be seriously
injured.
You may also damageyour vehicle; the resulting
repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.
Pull atrailer only if you have followed allthe
steps in this section. Ask your dealer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
--
,
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight ofthe Trailer’’
that appears later in this section. But trailering is
different than just driving your vehicle by itself.
Trailering means changes in handling, durability and
fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct
equipment, and it has tobe used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules.
Many of these are important for your safety and thatof
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engineis required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating extra
heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind
resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
a There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig willbe legal, not only where youlive but
also where you’ll bedriving. A good source for this
information canbe state or provincial police.
a Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
a Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles
(1 600 km)your new vehicle isdriven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
0
Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and
don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other partsof your vehicle wear inat the
heavier loads.
0
Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Don’t drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers (or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h)) to
save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
4-31
Three important considerations have to
do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
the weight of the trailer tongue
and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weighmore than 1,500 lbs. (680 kg)
under normal driving conditions. It should never weigh
more than 1,000 lbs. (450 kg) when driven on long
grades at high ambient temperatures (Above
90” F
(32” C). But even thatcan be too heavy.
It depends on how you planto use your rig.For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle
is used to pulla
trailer are all important. And,it can also dependon any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
4-32
You can ask your dealerfor our trailering informationor
advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Motor Division Customer Assistance
Department
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, OntarioL1H 8P7
Weight of the Trail I 1 I‘ongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer
is an important
weight to measure becauseit affects the totalor gross
weight of your vehicle.The Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo you may carryin it, and the people who will
be
riding inthe vehicle. Andif you tow a trailer, you must
add the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle
will be carrying that weight, too. See “Loading
Your
Vehicle” in the Indexfor more infomation about your
vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’stires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers onthe
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door or
see “Loading Your Vehicle” inthe Index. Then be sure
you don’t go over the GVW limit for your vehicle,
including the weightof the trailer tongue.
A
B
If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you have a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent of
the total loaded trailer weight (B).
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to seeif the weights are
proper. If they aren’t, you may be able to getthem right
simply bymoving some items around in thetrailer.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are a
few reasons why you’ll needthe right hitch. Here are
some rules to follow:
The rear bumper on your vehicleis not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use onlya frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Will you have to make any holes inthe body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you don’t seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into your
vehicle (see “Carbon Monoxide” in theIndex). Dirt
and watercan, too.
4-33
Safety Chains
Driving with a Trailer
You should always attach chains between your vehicle Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
to
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongueBefore settingout for the open road, you’ll want get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with
the feel of
of the trailerso that the tongue will not
drop to the road
handling
and
braking
with
the
added
weight
of the
if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions
trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle are
you
about safety chainsmay be provided by the hitch
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly
as
manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer. Followthe
responsive as your vehicleis by itself.
manufacturer’s recommendationfor attaching safety
chains anddo not attach them to the bumper. Always
Before you start, checkthe trailer hitch and platform
leave just enough slackso you can turn with your rig.
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
And, never allow safety chains
to drag on the ground.
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment.
If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
Trailer Brakes
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure
If your trailer weighs more than1,000 lbs. (450 kg)
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
loaded, then it needs its own brakes-- and they must be
electrical connection at the same time.
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
During your trip, check occasionally
to be sure that the
the trailer brakesso you’ll be ableto install, adjust and
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer brakes
maintain them properly. Because you have anti-lock
are still working.
brakes, do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems won’t work well, Following Distance
or at all.
Stay at least twiceas far behind the vehicle aheadas you
would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This
can help you avoid situations that require heavy braking
and sudden turns.
4-34
Passing
You’ll need morepassing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, tomove the trailer to the left, just
move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if
possible, have someone guide you.
Making Turns
NOTICE:
Making very sharp turns while trailering could
cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
lhrn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you towa trailer, your vehicle may needa
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your Chevrolet dealer. The green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash whenever you signal a turn
or lane change. Properly hookedup, the trailer lamps
will also flash, telling other drivers you’re about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the green arrows on your
instrument panel will flash for turns evenif the bulbs on
the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
4-35
Driving On Grades
Parking onHills
Reduce speed andshift to a lower gearbefore you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your
brakes so much that
they would get hot andno longer work well.
You really shouldnot park your vehicle, with a trailer
attached, on a hill. If something goes wrong, your rig
could start to move. People
can be injured, and both
your vehicle andthe trailer can bedamaged.
On a long uphillgrade, shift down and reduce your
speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce the
possibility of engine and transmissionoverheating.
But if you ever have to park yourrig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
If you are towing a trailer and you have an automatic
transmission with overdrive, you may prefer todrive in
DRIVE (D) insteadof AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE
or, as you need to,a lower gear). Or, if you have a
manual transmission with FIFTH(5) or SIXTH (6)gear,
it is best to drive in FOURTH (4) gear (if five speed
manual transmission) or FIFTH ( 5 ) gear (if you havea
six speed manualtransmission) (or, as you needto, a
lower gear).
(a)
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet, or into gearfor a manual transmission.
2. Have someone placechocks under the trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes. Then apply your parking brakes until
the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your parking
brake and then shiftto PARK(P) or REVERSE (R)
for a manual transmission.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-36
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Start your engine;
Shift into a gear; and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clearof the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will needservice more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See theMaintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t
overfill), engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, belt, cooling
system and brakeadjustment. Each of these is covered
in this manual, and the Index will help youfind them
quickly. If you’re trailering, it’s a good idea to review
these sections before you start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See “Engine Overheating”
in the Index.
4-37
fi
4-38
NOTES
0 Section 5
Problems on the Road
Here you’ll find what to do about some problems that can occur on the road.
5-2
5-3
5-7
5- 14
Hazard Warning Flashers
Jump Starting
Towing Your Vehicle
Engine Overheating
5 -26
5 -27
5-38
5-39
If a Tire Goes Flat
Changing a Flat Tire
Compact Spare Tire
If You’re Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
5-1
Hazard Warning Flashers
Press the button into make
your front and rear turn
signal lamps flash on
and off.
Your hazard warningflashers work no matter what
position your keyis in,and evenif the key isn't in.
To turn off the flashers, pull
out on the collar.
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you
have a problem. Your front and
rear turn signal lamps willflash on andoff.
When the hazard warningflashers are on, your turn
signals won't work.
Other W
lingDevices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the sideof the road about 300 feet (100m) behind
your vehicle.
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
Chevrolet. But please follow the steps below to do
it safely.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be
dangerous because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explodeor ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these
steps exactly, someor all
of these things can hurt you.
NOTICE:
Ignoring these steps could result in costlydamage
to your vehicle that wouldn’t be coveredby
your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushingor pulling
it won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
NOTICE:
If the other system isn’ta 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles can be damaged.
5-3
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, butbe sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other.If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want.You wouldn’t be able to
start your Chevrolet, and the bad grounding could
damage theelectrical systems.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Turn off all
lights that aren’t needed, andradios. This will avoid
sparks and help save bothbatteries. And it could
save your radio!
I
I
NOTICE:
If you leaveyour radio on, it could be badly
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be coveredby
your warranty.
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries.
5 . Find the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on
each battery.
5-4
Using a matchnear a battery can causebattery
gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight
if
you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water.You don’t
need to add water to the Delco [email protected]
installed in everynew GM vehicle. But if a
battery has filler caps, besure theright amount
of fluid is there.If it is low, add water to take care
of that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could
be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t get it on you. If you accidentally getit in
your eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with
water and get medicalhelp immediately.
6. Check that the jumpercables don’t have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged, too.
7. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of
the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one.
Before you connect the cables, here are some basic
things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) and negative (-) will go to negative (-)
or a metal engine part. Don’t connect positive (+) to
negative (-) or you’ll get a short that would damage
the battery and maybeother parts, too.
I
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure you
badly. Keep your hands away from moving parts
once the engineis running.
8. Don’t let the other end
touch metal. Connect it
to the positive (+)
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+>terminal if
the vehicle hasone. But
don’t use the junction
block on your vehicle.
5-5
Now connect the black
negative (-) cable to
the good battery’s
negative (-) terminal.
Don’t let the other end
touch anything until the
next step.
12. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
13. Try to start the vehicle with the dead battery.
If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
14. Remove the cables in reverse orderto prevent
electrical shorting. Take carethat they don’t touch
each other or any other metal.
10. The other end
of the negative(-) cable doesn’t go to the
dead battery.It goes to a heavy unpainted metal
part on
the engineof the vehicle with the dead battery.
11. Attach the cable at least
18 inches (45 cm) away
from the dead battery,
but not near engine
parts that move. The
electrical connection is
just as good there, but
the chance of sparks
getting back to the
battery is much less.
A. Heavy Metal Engine Part
B. Good Battery
C. Dead Battery
5-6
Towing Your Vehicle
Try to have a GM dealer or aprofessional towing
service tow your vehicle. See “Roadside Assistance’’ in
the Index.
If your vehicle has been changed or modified since it
was factory-new by adding aftermarket items like fog
lamps, aero skirting, orspecial tires and wheels, these
instructions and illustrations may not becorrect.
Before you do anything, turn on the hazard
warning flashers.
When you call, tell the towing service:
That your vehicle cannot be towed from the front or
rear with sling-type equipment.
That your vehicle has rear-wheel drive.
0
The make, model and year of your vehicle.
Whether you can still move the shift lever.
If there was an accident, what was damaged.
When the towing service arrives, let the tow operator
know that this manual contains detailed towing
instructions and illustrations. The operator may want to
see them.
t
1
To help avoid injury to you or o
Never let passengers ride in a vehiclethat is
being towed.
Never tow faster than safe or posted speeds.
Never tow with damaged parts not fully secured.
Never get under your vehicle after it has
been liftedby the tow truck.
Always secure the vehicle on each side with
separate safety chains when towingit.
Never use J-hooks. Use T-hooks instead.
5-7
-
I \
CAUTIOI.:
A vehicle can fall from a car carrierif it isn’t
adequately secured. This can cause a collision,
serious personal injury andvehicle damage. The
vehicle should be tightly secured with chains
or
steel cables beforeit is transported.
Don’t use substitutes (ropes, leather straps,
canvas webbing, etc.)that can be cut by sharp
edges underneath the towed vehicle. Always use
T-hooks inserted in the T-hook slots. Never use
J-hooks. They will damage drivetrain and
suspension components.
5-8
When your vehicle is being towed, have the
ignition key
turned to the OFF position. The steering wheel should
be clamped in a straight-aheadposition, with a clamping
device designed for towing service. Do not use the
vehicle’s steering column lockfor this. The transmission
should be in NEUTRAL (N) and the parking
brake released.
Don’t have your vehicle towed on the drive wheels,
unless you must. If the vehicle mustbe towed on the
drive wheels,be sure to follow the speed and distance
restrictions later in this section
or your transmission will
be damaged. If these limitations must be exceeded, then
the drive wheels haveto be supported on a dolly.
Front Towing
Tow Limits -- 35 mph (55 km/h), 50 miles (80 km)
NOTICE:
Do not tow withsling-type equipmentor
fascidfog lamp damage will occur.
Use wheel-lift orcarcarrier equipment.
Additional ramping may be required
for
carcarrier equipment. Use safety chains and
wheel straps.
5-9
NOTICE:
Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to
suspension components when using car carrier
equipment. Always use T-hooks inserted in the
T-hook slots.
Attach T-hook chainsto slots in frame, rearward of the
front wheels, on both sides.
5-10
NOTICE:
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or
fascidfog lamp damage will occur. Use wheel-lift
or car-carrier equipment. Additional ramping
may berequired for car-carrierequipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps. Use the T-slots for
car-carrier securing. Towing a vehicle over rough
surfaces could damage a vehicle. Damagecan
occur from vehicle to ground or vehicle to
wheel-lift equipment contact. To help avoid
damage, install a towing dollyand raise vehicle
until adequate clearance is obtained between the
ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
Attach a separatesafety chain around outboardend of
each lower control arm.
I NOTICE:
Take care not to damage the brakepipes and
brake lines hosesor the ABS sensor and wiring.
I
1
Rear Towing
I
(Continued)
NOTICE:
T-hook slots. On the Camaro RS, additional care
may berequired due to limitedground clearance
with front-fascia extension.
NOTICE:
I NOTICE:
Do not attach winch cablesor J-hooks to
suspension components when using
car-carrier
equipment, Always use T-hooksinserted in the
NOTICE: (Continued)
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment or rear
bumper valance will be damaged.Use wheel-lift
or car-carrierequipment. Additionalramping
may berequired for car-carrierequipment. Use
safety chains and wheel straps. Towing a vehicle
over roughsurfaces could damagea vehicle.
Damage can occurfrom vehicle to ground or
vehicle to wheel-liftequipment contact. To help
avoid damage,install a towing dollyand raise
vehicle until adequate clearance is obtained
between the ground and/or wheel-lift equipment.
I
\
b
/
P
Attach T-hook chains in front of rear wheels, in the
bottom of frame rail, on both sides.
Zttach a separate safety chain around each outboard end
of the rearaxle.
FNOTICE:
c
Take care not to damage the brake pipes, brake
line hoses and cables.
5-13
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage onyour
vehicle’s instrument panel.You may alsofind a low
coolant warning light on your vehicle’s instrument panel
(5.7LV8 Engine).
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Steam from an overheated engine canburn you
badly, evenif youjust open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you seeor hearsteam coming
from it. Just turn it off and get everyone away
from the vehicle until it cools down. Waituntil
there is no signof steam or coolant beforeyou
open the hood.
If you keepdriving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or
others could be badlyburned. Stop your engineif
it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the
engine is cool.
NOTICE:
If your engine catchesfire because you keep
driving with no coolant,your vehicle can be
badly damaged.The costly repairs would not be
covered byyour warranty.
5-14
If No Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
If you get the overheat warning but see or hear no
steam, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes
the engine can get a littletoo hot when you:
Climb a longhill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with nosign of steam,
try this for aminute or so:
1. Turn off your air conditioner.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, driveslower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can
drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for two or three minutes while you’re parked, to see if
the warning stops. But then, if you still have the
warning, turn o f t h e engine andget everyone out of the
vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
2. Turn on your heater to fullhot at thehighest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving -- AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (a)
or
DRIVE (D) for automatic transmissions.
5-15
When you decide it’ssafe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
I
A CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can
start up even when the engine
is not running and
can injureyou. Keep hands, clothing and tools
away from any underhood electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank
is boiling,
don’t do anything else until it cools down.
c‘
I
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Radiator Pressure Cap
C. Coolant Recovery Tank
When it is cool, remove the coolant recovery tankcap
and look atthe dipstick.
5-16
The coolantlevel should be FULLCOLD.
If it isn’t, you may have a leak in the radiator hoses,
heater hoses, radiator, water pump or somewhere else in
the cooling system.
Heater and radiatorhoses, and otherengine
parts, canbe very hot. Don’ttouch them. If you
do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine, it could lose all coolant.That could
cause an engine fire, and you could beburned.
Get any leak fixed before youdrive the vehicle.
I
NOTICE:
Engine damage from running yourengine
without coolant isn’t coveredby your warranty.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check to
see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.If the
engine is overheating, both fans should be running. If
they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant level
isn’t at FULLCOLD, add a 50/50 mixture of clean
water (preferably distilled) and [email protected]
coolant at the coolant recovery tank. (See “Engine
Coolant” in the Index for more information.)
5-17
A CAUTION:
I
Adding only plainwater to your cooling system
can be dangerous.Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol,can boil beforethe proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’s coolant
warning system isset for the proper
coolant
mixture. With plainwater or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too
hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire and you or others could beburned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
I /1\ CAUTION:
I NOTICE:
In cold weather,water can freeze and crack the
engine, radiator, heater core and otherparts.
Use the recommended coolantand the proper
coolant mixture.
5-18
I
I
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and itwill burn if the engine parts arehot
enough. Don’t spill coolant onhot
a engine.
When the coolantin the coolant recoverytank is at
FULL COLD, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.
A CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out andburn you badly. They
are underpressure, and if you turn the radiator
pressure cap even a little they can come out
at high speed. Neverturn the capwhen the
cooling system,including the radiatorpressure
cap, is hot. Waitfor thecooling systemand
radiator pressure cap to cool if youever have to
turn the pressure cap.
--
--
5-19
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
(3800 V6 Engine Only)
I NOTICE:
Your engine has a specific radiator fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure could cause your
engine to overheat and be severely damaged.
1. You can remove the radiator pressurecap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiatorhose, is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first
stops. (Don't press down while turning
the
pressure cap.)
If you hear a hiss, wait
for that to stop.A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push
down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.
5-20
A CAUTION:
You can be burned ifyou spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on a hot engine.
4. Fill the radiator with the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture, up to the baseof the fillerneck.
(See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.)
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an air
bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise, close the
valve after the radiator is filled.
3. After the engine cools, open the coolantair bleed valve.
3800 V6 (VIN Code K): There is one bleed valve. It
is located on the thermostat housing.
5-21
5. Then fill the coolant recovery tankto FULL COLD.
6. Put the cap back onthe coolant recovery tank, but
leave the radiator pressurecap off.
7. Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch for
out the
engine cooling fans.
8. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
filler neck maybe lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the [email protected] mixture
through thefiller neck until the level reaches the
base of the filler neck.
5-22
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator
(V8 Engine Only)
NOTICE:
The LSl Engine (Code G) has a specific radiator
fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure
could cause your engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
9. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
this procedure if coolant beginsto flow out of the
filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the
arrows on the pressure cap line up like this.
5-23
1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure cap
and upper radiator hose,is no longer hot. Turn the
pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first
stops. (Don’t press down while turningthe
pressure cap.)
If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means
there is still some pressure left.
5-24
2. Then keep turningthe pressure cap, but now push
down as youturn it. Remove the pressure cap.
A CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burnif the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on
a hot engine.
3. Fill with the proper [email protected] mixture.
4. Continue to fill the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck.
7. Shut the engine off and replace the pressure cap.Be
sure the arrows on the cap line up like this.
5 . Rinse or wipe the spilled coolant from the engine
and compartment.
6. Start the engine and allow it to run in idle for
approximately four minutes. By this time, the
coolant level inside the radiator willbe lower. Add
more of the proper mixture through thefiller neck
until the level reaches the baseof the filler neck.
5-25
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusualfor a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain yourtires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it’s much morelikely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a “blowout,” here area few
tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward thatside. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
8.
Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the
proper level.
For a complete drain, flush and refill, see your Chevrolet
dealer ora Chevrolet Service Manual. To purchase a
service manual, see “Service and Owner Publications”
in theIndex.
5-26
A rear blowout, particularlyon a curve, acts muchlike a
skid and mayrequire the same correction you’d use in a
skid. In any rear blowout, removeyour foot from the
accelerator pedal. Get thevehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle togo. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you
can still steer. Gently
brake toa stop -- well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows howto use your
jacking equipmentto change a flat tire safely.
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your hazard
warning flashers.
Changing a tire cancause an injury. The vehicle
roll over youor other
can slip off the jack and
people. You and they could be badlyinjured.
Find a level placeto change your tire. To help
prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brakefirmly.
2. Put anautomatic transmission shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transmission to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. l h r n off the engine.
To be evenmore certain the vehicle won’t move,
you can putblocks at the front and rear
of the
tire farthestaway from the one being changed.
That would bethe tire on the otherside of the
vehicle, at the opposite end.
The following steps will tell you how to usethe jack and
change a tire.
5-27
Removing the Spare Tire andTools
The equipment you’ll need is in the right (passenger)
rear area behind the trim panel.
First you must remove theclose-out panel. See
“Close-Out Panel” inthe Index.
Find the plastic screw heads inthe trim panel over the
spare tire. Use a coin or a key to turn the screw heads
until the slots point front and backto the unlock
position. Gently lift the trim panelfront forward edge
and moveit out of the way.
5-28
Remove the wing nut and adapter and pull out the spare.
See “Compact Spare Tire’’ later in this section for more
information aboutthe compact spare.
A
I
To remove the jack and wheel wrench, loosenand
remove the bolt and remove theplastic cover.
The tools you'll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B).
5-29
The jack has a bolt at the end. Attach the wheel wrench
to the jack bolt.
Turn the wheel wrench tothe right to raise the lift head
a little.
If your wheel hasa center cap, pry it off using the
wheel wrench.
5-30
If your vehicle hasa bolt-on wheel cover, loosen the
plastic caps using the wheel wrench and remove
the
wheel cover.
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire
1. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheelnuts.
Don’t remove themyet.
I
If your vehicle has optionalalloy wheels, each wheel
may have one locknut in place of the standard wheel
nut. A special wheel lock key (removaltool) and
instructions are located in the center console. Attach the
wheel lock key to the socket of the wheel wrench.
Remove the locking wheel nut by turning
to the left.
2. Position the jack under the vehicle.There is a notch
in the vehicle’s rockerflange. Raise thejack head
until it fits firmly into the notch nearest theflat tire.
5-31
b
On convertible models, place the jack
in a similar location.
Stay away from the moldingsor fender flanges to avoid
damaging them.
Put the compact sparetire near you.
5-32
/rl CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle whenit is jacked upis
dangerous. If the vehicle slipsoff the jack,you
could be badlyinjured or killed. Never getunder
a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.
A CA
TION:
Raising your vehicle withthe jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even make
the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal injury and
vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head
into the proper location beforeraising
the vehicle.
3. Raise the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench to the
right. Raise the vehiclefar enough off the ground so
there is enough roomfor the spare tire to fit.
off the flat tire.
Remove all the wheel nuts and take
4. Remove anyrust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces and
spare wheel.
1 CAUTION:
v-
I
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened,can make the wheel nuts
become looseafter a time.The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When you change
a
wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from the places
where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an
emergency, you can use a clothor a paper towel
to do this; but be sure to use ascraper orwire
brush later, if you need to,to get allthe rust or
dirt off.
5-34
Never use oilor grease onstuds or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel could
fall off, causing a serious accident.
5. Replace the wheel nuts with the rounded endof the
nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand
until the wheelis held against the hub.
7. Tighten the wheel nuts
firmly in a crisscross
sequence as shown.
6. Lower the vehicle by rotating the wheel wrench left.
Lower the jackcompletely.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose
and even comeoff. This could lead to an accident.
Be sure touse the correct wheel nuts. If you have
to replace them, besure to get new GM original
equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have the
nuts tightened witha torque wrench to 100 lb-ft
(140 N.m).
5-35
I
S+-ri~-a F1 or Spare Tire and Tools
-
NOTICE:
Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead to
brake pulsation and rotordamage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
Don’t try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It won’tfit. Store the wheel cover in the rear
area until youhave the flat tire repaired or replaced.
I NOTICE:
Wheel covers won’tfit on your compact spare. If
you try to put a wheel coveron your compact
spare, you could damagethe cover or the spare.
5-36
’
Storing a jack, a tire or other t lipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury.In a sudden stop or collision, loose
equipment could strike someone. Store all these
in the proper place.
~
Replace the jack, wheel wrench andflat tire using the
storage instructions. When you replacethe trim panel,
be sure to tuck it under the weatherstrip.
1. Trim Panel
2. Bolt
3. Cover
4. Jack
5. Wing Nut
6. Adapter
7. Compact Spare Tire
8. Full-Size Tire
9. Carpet Flap
10. Tire Storage Bolt
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compactspare tire was fully inflated when
your vehicle wasnew, it can lose air after a time. Check
the inflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 60 psi
(420 Wa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you
should stop assoon as possible and make sure your spare
tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds upto 65 mph (105 km/h) for
distances up to3,000 miles (5 OOO km), so you can finish
your trip and have your full-size tire repaired or replaced
where you want. (When the compact spare is used on the
rear axle, see Notice following.)Of course, it’s best to
replace your spare witha full-size tireas soon as you can.
Your spare will last longer
and be in good shapein case
you need it again.
NOTICE:
If the compact spare is used as a rear tire, do not
drive faster than50 mph (80 km/h). Damage to
the rearaxle may occurif the compact spare is
driven faster than50 mph (80 km/h).
i
5-3s
I NOTICE:
When the compact spare is installed, don’ttake
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with
guide rails.The compact spare can get caught on
the rails. That can damagethe tireand wheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
And don’t mix your compactspare tire or wheel with
other wheelsor tires. They won’t fit. Keep your spare
tire and its wheel together.
I
NOTICE:
Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare. Using
them can damage your vehicle and can damage
the chains too. Don’t usetire chains on your
compact spare.
If You’re Stuck: InSand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
NOTICE:
What you don’t wantto do when your vehicle is stuck is
to spin your wheelstoo fast. The method known as
“rocking” can help you get out whenyou’re stuck, but
you must usecaution.
Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of your
vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the wheels
too fast while shifting your transmission back
and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
I /i\ CAUTION:
I
If you letyour tires spin at high speed, theycan
explode, and you or others could be injured. And,
the transmission or other parts of the vehicle can
overheat. That could cause an engine
compartment fireor other damage. When you’re
stuck, spin the wheels as little as possible. Don’t
spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown
on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle,
see “TireChains” in the Index.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels.
If your vehicle has
ASR, you should turn the system off. (See “ASR System”
in the Index.) Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R)and a forward gear (or witha manual
transmission, between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) and
REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little as possible.
Release the accelerator pedal whileyou shift, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal whenthe transmission is in
gear. If that doesn’t get you out aftera few tries, you may
need to be towed out.If you do need to be towed out, see
“Towing Your Vehicle” in the Index.
5-39
&I
5-40
NOTES
Section 6 Service and Appearance Care
Here you will find information about the care of your vehicle. This section begins with service and fuel information,
and then it shows how to checkimportant fluid and lubricant levels. There is alsotechnical information about your
vehicle, and a part devoted to its appearance care.
6-2
6-3
6-5
6-6
6-8
6-8
6- 12
6-18
6-20
6-24
6-26
6-30
6-3 1
6-33
6-37
Service
Fuel
Fuels in Foreign Countries
Filling Your Tank
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under the Hood
Engine Oil
Air Cleaner
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Manual Transmission Fluid
Engine Coolant
Power Steering Fluid
Windshield Washer Fluid
Brakes
Battery
6-37
6-43
6-52
6-53
6-55
6-57
6-5 8
6-60
6-6 1
6-62
6-62
6-69
6-69
Bulb Replacement
Tires
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Care of Safety Belts
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome Wheels
(If Equipped)
Underbody Maintenance
Appearance Care Materials Chart
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Electrical System
Replacement Bulbs
Capacities and Specifications
6-1
Service
Doing Your Own Service Work
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you
to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealerfor
all your service needs. You’ll get genuineGM parts and
GM-trained and supported service people.
If you want to do some of your ownservice work, you’ll
want to use the proper Chevrolet Service Manual. It
tells
you much more about howto service your vehicle than
this manual can.To order the proper service manual, see
“Service and Owner Publications”in the Index.
We hope you’ll wantto keep your GM vehicle allGM.
Genuine GM parts haveone of these marks:
-
7 h a a
Genuine
6-2
Your vehicle has anair bag system. Before attemptingto
do your own service work,see “Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle’’ in the Index.
You should
keep
record
a with
all parts receipts
and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See “Maintenance Record” in the Index.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Your Vehicle
You can be injured and your vehicle couli e
damaged if you try to do servicework on a
vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools beforeyou attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused.If you use
the wrong fasteners, parts can later break
or fall off. You could behurt.
Things you might addto the outside of your vehiclecan
affect the airflow aroundit. This may cause wind noise
and affect windshield washer performance. Check with
your dealer before adding equipment to the outside of
your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicleidentification number
(VIN) showsthe code letter foryour engine. You will
find the VIN at the top left of your instrument panel.
(See “VehicleIdentification Number” inthe Index.)
If you havethe 3800 engine (VIN CodeK), use
regular unleaded gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher.
If you have the 5.7L engine (VIN Code G), use
premium unleaded gasoline rated at 91 octane or
higher for best performance.You may use middle
grade or regular unleaded gasolines, but your vehicle
may not accelerate as well.
6-3
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet
specifications ASTM D4814 in the United States
and CGSB 3.5-M93 in Canada. Improvedgasoline
specifications have been developed by the American
Automobile Manufacturers Association (AAMA)
for
better vehicle performance andengine protection.
Gasolines meetingthe AAMA specification could
provide improveddriveability and emissioncontrol
system protection comparedto other gasolines.
’
Be sure the posted octane for premium is at least 91 (at
least 89 for middle grade and 87 for regular). If the
octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy knocking
noise when you drive.If it’s badenough, it can damage
your engine.
If you’re usingfuel rated at the recommended octane or
higher and you hear heavyknocking, your engine needs
service. But don’tworry if you heara little pinging
noise when you’reaccelerating or driving up a hill.
That’s normal, and you don’t have
to buy a higher
octane fuel to get ridof pinging. It’s the heavy, constant
knock that means youhave a problem.
If your vehicleis certified to meet California Emission
Standards (indicated on the underhood emission
control
label), it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
6-4
California specifications. If such fuels are not available
in states adoptingCalifornia emissions standards, your
vehicle willoperate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications,but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel may turn on and/or your
vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this occurs, return
to your authorized Chevroletdealer for diagnosis to
determine the cause of failure. In the event itis
determined that the cause
of the condition is the typeof
fuels used, repairs may not be covered by your warranty.
Some gasolines thatare not reformulatedfor low
emissions containan octane-enhancing additivecalled
methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT);
ask yourservice station operator whetheror not his fuel
contains MMT. General Motorsdoes not recommendthe
use of such gasolines.If fuels containing MMT are used,
spark plug life may be reduced and your emission
control system performance maybe affected. The
malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel
may turn on. Ifthis occurs, return to your authorized
Chevrolet dealer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent deposits from forming in your engine and fuel
system, allowing your emission control system to
function properly. Therefore, you should not have to
add anything to the fuel. In addition, gasolines
containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines may be available in your area to
help clean the air. General Motors recommends that you
use these gasolines if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
NOTICE:
Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Don’t use it. It can corrode
metal parts in your fuel system and also damage
plastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldn’t
be covered under your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan ondriving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard to
find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel not
recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.
To check on fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country whereyou’ll be driving.
You can also write us at thefollowing address for
advice. Just tellus where you’re going and give your
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Overseas Distribution Corporation
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
6-5
Filling Your Tank
Gasoline vapor is highly flammable. It burns
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
Don’t smoke if you’re near gasoline or refueling
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from gasoline.
The cap is behind a hinged door on theleft side of
your vehicle.
While refueling,hang the cap by the tether from the pin
on the fuel door.
6-6
To remove the cap, turn it slowly tothe left
(counterclockwise). The caphas a spring in it; if you let
go of the cap toosoon, it will spring back to the right.
BN:
If you get gasolineon yourself and then
something ignites it, you couldbe badly burned.
Gasoline can spray out
on you if youopen the
fuel filler cap too quickly.This spray can happen
if your tank is nearly full, and is more likely in
hot weather. Open the fuel filler cap slowly and
wait for any “hiss” noiseto stop. Then unscrew
the capall the way.
Be careful not to spill gasoline. Clean gasoline from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See “Cleaning the
Outside of Your Vehicle” inthe Index.
When you putthe cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system
can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. See “Malfunction
Indicator Lamp” in the Index.
NOTICE:
If you need a newcap, be sure to get the right
type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get
the wrong type,it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light
and your fuel tank andemissions system may be
damaged. See “MalfunctionIndicator Lamp” in
the Index.
6-7
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking ThingsUnder the Hood
A CAUTION:
A CAUTION:
Never filla portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the gasoline vapor.You can
be badlyburned and your vehicle damagedif this
occurs. To help avoidinjury to you and others:
Dispense gasoline onlyinto approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is insidea
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other thanthe ground.
Bring the fill nozzlein contact with the
inside of the fill opening before
operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
An electricfan underthe hood can start upand
injure you even whenthe engine is not running.
Keep hands, clothing and tools awayfrom any
underhood electric fan.
6-8
I
U
Things that burncan get onhot engine parts and
start a fire. These include
liquids like gasoline,
oil, coolant,brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others
could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spill
things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood, first pull
the handle inside the lower
left side of your vehicle.
I
n
I
Then go to the frontof the vehicle and pullup on the
hood release located at the center area of the hood.
Lift the hood.
6-9
When you open the hood of the 3800 V6 Engine you’ll see:
A. Engine Coolant Reservoir
€3. Battery
C. Radiator Fill Cap
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap
E. Automatic Transmission
Dipstick (If Equipped)
E Windshield Washer Reservoir
G. Engine Cooling Fans
H. Air Cleaner
I.
J.
K.
L.
PowerSteeringReservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(If Equipped)
When you open the hood of the 5.7L V8 Engine you'll see:
A.
B.
C.
D.
Engine Coolant Reservoir
Battery
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill Cap
E. Automatic Transmission
Dipstick (If Equipped)
E Engine Cooling Fans
G. Windshield Washer Reservoir
H. Air Cleaner
I. PowerSteeringReservoir
J. Brake Fluid Reservoir
K. Clutch Fluid Reservoir
(If Equipped)
Before closing the hood, besure all the filler caps
are on.
Then just pull the hood down and closeit firmly.
Engine Oil
LOW OIL
If the LOW OIL light on
the instrument panel comes
on, it means you need to
check your engineoil
level right away. For more
information, see “Low Oil
Light” in the Index.
You should check your engineoil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
It’s a good ideato check your engineoil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the
oil must
be warm and the vehicle mustbe on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick is the yellow loop near the back
of the engine
Note: Do not check the5.7L engine oillevel after the
A higher than normal
engine has been sitting overnight,
reading might be obtained. Check
oil level with the oil
warm. Shut off the engine, wait a few minutes, and then
check theoil.
Turn off the engine and give the
oil a few minutesto
drain back into theoil pan. If you don’t, the oil dipstick
might not show the actuallevel.
6-12
6-13
NOTICE:
Don’t add too much oil.If your engine hasso
much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area upper mark that shows
the proper operating range, your engine
could be damaged.
The oilfill cap is located onthe valve cover near the
oil dipstick.
Be sure tofill it enough toput the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all theway
back in when you’re through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
Oils recommendedfor your vehicle canbe identified by
looking for the “Starburst” symbol.This symbol
indicates that the oil has been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use any oil which
does not carrythis Starburst symbol.
If you change your own oil,
be sure you use oil that has
the Starburst symbol onthe
front of the oilcontainer. If
you have youroil changed
for you, be sure the oil put
into your engine is
American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.
You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the following chart:
6-14
RECOMMENDED SA€ VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMY AND COLD STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSm GRADE OIL FOR THE EXPECTED TEMPERANRE RANGE.
As shown in thechart, if you have the 5.7L engine,
SAE 5W-30 is best for your vehicle. However, youcan
use SAE 1OW-30 if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C) or
above. These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils,
such as SAE 2OW-50.
HOT
WEATHER
r
"F
7
\
"C
+ 100 -
c 3a
+ao-
t 27
+ 60 -
+ 16
+40 -
k4
+ 20 -
-7
0-
- 18
SAE sw-30
PREFERRED
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE 2OW-SO OR ANY OTHER
GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED
5.7L V8 Engine
6-15
RECOMMENDEDSAEVISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
FOR BEST FUEL ECONOMYAND COUl STARTING, SELECT THE LOWEST
SAE VISCOSITY GRADE OIL FOR THEEXPECTED TEMPERATURE RANBE.
WOK
FOR THIS
SYMBOL
HOT
WEATHER
-
'OF
\
"C
+loo-
- +38
+EO-
- +27
\
c60- - +16
+4Q-
As shown in the chart, if you have the 3800 engine, SAE
low-30 is best for your vehicle. However, you can use
SAE 5W-30 if it's going to be colder than 60°F (16°C)
before your next oil change. When
it's very cold, you
should useSAE 5W-30. These numbers on anoil
container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use
other viscosity oils, such asSAE 20W-50.
-+b
+20---7
0---18
NOTICE:
-I
w 0°F
SAL SW-30 .bo
(-18'C)
I
I
COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE2OW.50 OR ANY OTHER
3800 V6 Engine
Use only engine oil with the American Petroleum
Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines
"Starburst" symbol. Failureto use the
recommended oil can result in engine damage not
covered by your warranty.
GM Goodwrench' oil meets allthe requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are inan area where the temperature falls below
-20°F (-29"C), consider using either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don’t add anything to your oil. Your dealer is ready to
advise if you think something should be added.
When to Change Engine Oil
If any one of these is true for you, use theshort tripkity
maintenance schedule:
0
Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This isparticularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
0
Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
0
Most trips are through dusty areas.
0
You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
0
The vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
Driving under these conditions causes engine oil to
break down sooner.If any one of these is true for your
vehicle, then you needto change your oil and filter
every 3,000 miles (5 000 km)or 3 months -- whichever
occurs first.
If none of them is true, use the long triphighway
maintenance schedule. Change the oil and filter every
7,500 miles (12 500 km) or 12 months -- whichever
occurs first. Driving a vehicle with a fully warmed
engine under highway conditions causes engine oil to
break down slower.
What to Do with Used Oil
Did you know that usedengine oil contains certain
elements that may be unhealthyfor your skin and could
even cause cancer? Don’t let usedoil stay on your slun
for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and
water, or agood hand cleaner. Washor properly throw
away clothing or rags containing used engine oil. (See
the manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.)
Used oil can be a real threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all free-flowing oil
from the filter before disposal. Don’t ever dispose of oil
by putting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, into
sewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,
recycle it by taking it toa place that collects used oil. If
you have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
6-17
Air Cleaner
Operating the engine withthe air cleaner off can
cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner
not only cleansthe air, it stops flame if the engine
backfires. If it isn’t there, and the engine
backfires, you could beburned. Don’t drive with
it off, and be careful working onthe engine with
the air cleaner off.
Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine when to
replace the air filter.
See “Scheduled MaintenanceServices” in the Index.
6-18
If the air cleaner is off, a backfire can cause a
damaging engine fire. And,
dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always
have the air cleaner in place when you’re driving.
Air Filter Replacement
To remove the air filter:
2. Lift the cover and removethe air filter.
3. Replace the filter, close the cover and latch
the clamps.
6-19
Automatic Transmission Fluid
How to Check
When to Check and Change
Because this operation canbe a little difficult, you may
choose to havethis done at your Chevrolet dealership
Service Department.
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil ischanged.
Change both the fluid and filter every 15,000 miles
(25 000 km)if the vehicle is mainly driven underone
or more of these conditions:
0
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches90°F (32°C) or higher.
0
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Uses such as high performance operation.
0
When doing frequent trailer towing.
0
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any these
of
conditions, change the fluid and filter every
50,000 miles (83 000 km).
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services’’ the
in Index.
6-20
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
instructions here, or you could geta false reading on
the dipstick.
-
--
-
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that someof
the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
parts or exhaust system parts, starting
a fire. Be
sure to get an accurate reading if you check your
transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
0
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32"C).
At high speed for quite a while.
0
In heavy traffic -- especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F (82°C
to 93°C). See"Checking Transmission Fluid Hot" in
the Index.
Checking Transmission Fluid Cold
A cold check is made after the vehicle has beensitting
for eight hours or more with the engine off and is used
only as a reference. Let the engine run at idle for five
minutes if outside temperatures are 50°F ( 10°C) or
more. If it's colder than 50°F (lO"C), you may have to
idle the engine longer. Should the fluid level be low
during a cold check, you must perform a hot check
before adding fluid. This will give you a more accurate
reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Hot
or Cold
Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
Checking Transmission FluidHot
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 k m ) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (lO°C), drive the
vehicle in DRIVE (D) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remainssteady for 10 minutes. Then
follow the hot check procedures.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
0
Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
6-21
Then, without shuttingoff the engine, follow these steps:
!
3800 V6 Engine Transmission Dipstick
6-22
'..
5.7L VS Transmission Dipstick
The transaxle fluid handle is the red loop near the back
of the engine.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipeit with a clean rag or
paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be inthe COLD area for a
cold check or in theHOT area or cross-hatched area
for a hot check.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in allthe way.
How to Add Fluid
5.7L VS Transmission Dipstick
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See ''Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants'' in theIndex.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. (A cold check is used only as a
reference.) If the fluid level is low, add only enough of
the proper fluid to bringthe level up to the HOT area for
a hot check. It doesn't take much fluid, generally less
than one pint (0.5 L). Don't overfill.
3800 V6 Engine Transmission Dipstick
6-23
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the
NOTICE:
We recommend you use onlyfluid labeled
DEXR0N’-III, because fluid with that label is
made especiallyfor your automatic transmission.
Damage causedby fluid other thanDEXRON-111
is not covered by your new vehiclewarranty.
0
After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
0
When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Manual Transmission Fluid
When to Check
A good time to have it checked is when the engine
oil ischanged. However,the fluid in your manual
transmission doesn’trequire changing.
instructions here, or you could geta false reading.
NOTICE:
Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transmission. Too much can mean that some of
the fluid could comeout andfall on hot engine
parts orexhaust system parts, starting fire.
a Be
sure to get an accuratereading if you checkyour
transmission fluid.
Check the fluid level only when your engineis off, the
vehicle is parked on a level place and the transmission
is cool enoughfor you to rest yourfingers on the
transmission case.
Then, follow these steps:
1. Remove the filler plug.
How to Check
2. Check that the lubricantlevel is up to the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
Because this operation can be difficult, you may
choose to have this done at your Chevrolet
dealership
Service Department.
3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug andbe sure
it is fully seated.If the fluid level is low, add more
fluid as described inthe next steps.
6-24
How to Add Fluid
When to Check and What to Use
Here’s how to add fluid. Refer to the Maintenance
Schedule to determine what kind of fluid to use. See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in theIndex.
1. Remove the filler plug.
2. Add fluid at the fillerplug hole. Add only enough
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the bottom of the
filler plug hole.
3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fully seated.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicleis
self-adjusting. The clutch master cylinder reservoir is
filled with hydraulic clutch fluid.
It isn’t a good idea to “top off’ your clutch fluid.
Adding fluid won’t correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.
Have the system inspected and repaired.
Refer to theMaintenance Schedule todetermine how
often you should checkthe fluid level in yourclutch
master cylinder reservoir and for theproper fluid. See
“Owner Checks and Services” and “Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
6-25
How to Check
Limited-Slip Differential
The proper fluid should be addedif the level is below
the STEP mark on the reservoir.See the instructions
on thereservoir cap.
To add lubricant when the level is low, useAxle
Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345977). To completely refill
after draining, add 4 ounces (118 ml) of Limited-Slip
Differential Lubricant Additive(GMPart No. 1052358).
Then fill to the bottom of the filler plug hole with Axle
Lubricant (GMPart No. 12345977).
Rear Axle
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to changeit.
See “Scheduled MaintenanceServices” in the Index.
How to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the fillerplug hole,
you’ll need to add somelubricant. Add enoughlubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Standard Differential
Use Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. 12345977) or S A E
80W-90 GL-5 gear lubricant.
6-26
Engine Coolant
The cooling s stem in your vehicleis filled with
DEX-COOL engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehiclefor 5 years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km)whichever occursfirst, if you add only
DEX-COOL’ extended life coolant.
B
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating or if you need to add coolant to
your radiator,see “Engine Overheating”in the Index.
A 50/50 mixture of water and [email protected] coolant will:
0
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
0
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
0
Protect against rust and corrosion.
0
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
0
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
NOTICE:
When adding coolant, it is important thatyou use
only [email protected](silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other thanDEX-COOL is added to
the system, premature engine, heater core or
radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the
engine coolantwill require change sooner at
30,000 miles (50 000 km)or 24 months,
whichever occurs first. Damage causedby the
use of coolant other [email protected] not
covered by your new vehiclewarranty.
--
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean water (preferably
distilled) and one-half DEX-COOL’ coolant which
won’t damage aluminum parts.If you use this mixture,
you don’t needto add anything else.
Adding only plainwater to your cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid like alcohol, can boil beforethe proper
coolant mixture will. Your vehicle’scoolant
warning system is setfor the proper coolant
mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture,
your engine could get too
hot but you wouldn’t
get the overheat warning. Your engine could
catch fire andyou or otherscould beburned.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean water and
[email protected]
6-27
NOTICE:
Checking Coolant
If you use an improper coolant mixture,your
engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.
The repaircost wouldn't be covered byyour
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can
freeze and crack the engine, radiator, heater core
and otherparts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
I NOTICE:
If you use the proper coolant, youdon't have to
add extrainhibitors or additives which claimto
improve the system. Thesecan be harmful.
6-28
When your engine iscold, check thedipstick on the cap
of the coolant recovery tank.The coolant level should
be at COLD, or a little higher. When your engine is
warm, the levelon the dipstick should be up to HOT, or
a little higher.
m
If this light comes on, it
means you’re low on
engine coolant.
5.7L V8 Engine Only
Adding Coolantto the Recovery Tank
If you need more coolant, add the proper [email protected]
coolant mixture ut the coolant recovery tank, but only
when your engine is cool. If the tank is very low or
empty, also add coolant to the radiator. See “Engine
Overheating” in the Index for information.
Turning the radiatorpressure cap when the
engine and radiator arehot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burnyou
badly. Neverturn thepressure cap even a
little when the engine and radiator arehot.
--
--
Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
not to spill it.
You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and itwill burn if the engine parts arehot
a hot engine.
enough. Don’t spill coolant on
Radiator Pressure Cap (All Engines)
~
NOTICE:
Your radiator capis an 18 psi (124 kPa)
pressure-type cap andmust be tightly installedto
prevent coolant lossand possible enginedamage
from overheating. Be sure the arrows
on the cap
line up with the overflow tube on the radiator
filler neck.
When you replace your radiator pressure cap, a GM cap
is recommended.
6-29
Thermostat
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
Engine coolant temperature is controlled by a thermostat
in the engine coolant system.The thermostat stops the
flow of coolant through theradiator until the coolant
reaches a preset temperature.
It is not necessary to regularlycheck power steering
fluid unless you suspect thereis a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise.A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
When you replace your thermostat, a GM thermostat
is recommended.
Power Steering Fluid
The power steeringfluid
reservoir is toward the
How To Check Power Steering Fluid
When the engine compartment is cool, wipe the cap and
the top of the reservoir clean, then unscrewthe cap and
wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.Replace the cap and
completely tightenit. Then removethe cap again and
look at the fluid level on thedipstick.
The level should be at the full cold mark. If necessary,
add only enoughfluid to bringthe level up to the mark.
6-30
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants’’ in theIndex.
Always usethe proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washerfluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will be
operating your vehicle in an area where the temperature
may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has sufficient
protection against freezing.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level
should be at the H or hot mark.
When the enginecompartment is cool, the level
should be at the C or fullcold mark.
6-31
Adding Washer Fluid
NOTICE:
0
0
I
Open the caplabeled WASHER FLUID ONLY. Add
washer fluid untilthe tank is full.
6-32
0
0
When usingconcentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer
fluid. Water can cause the solution to freeze
and damage your washer fluid tank and
other partsof the washer system. Also,
water doesn’t cleanas well as washer fluid.
Fill your washer fluidtank only
three-quarters full whenit’s very cold. This
allows for expansion if freezing occurs,
which could damage the tank if it is
completely full.
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)
in
your windshield washer.It can damage
your washer systemand paint.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
of the brake system.If it is, you should have your brake
system fixed, sincea leak means that sooneror later your
brakes won’t work well, or won’t work at all.
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top
off’ your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings.You should add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when workis
done on the brake hydraulic system.
A CAUTIOP’:
F
Your brake master cylinderreservoir is here. It is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough.You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when workis done on the brake
hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the
reservoir mightgo down. The first is that the brake fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine when to
goes downto an acceptable level during normal brake
check your brakefluid. See “Periodic Maintenance
lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid level
Inspections’’ in the Index.
goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is leaking
out
6-33
Checking Brake Fluid
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3
brake fluid -- such as Delco Supreme 11 (GM Part
No. 12377967). Use new brake fluid from a sealed
container only.
@
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
I
A-CAUTION:
You can check the brakefluid without taking off thecap.
Just look at the brake fluid reservoir. The fluid level
should be above the plastic seam in the reservoir. itIf
isn't, have your brake system checkedto see if there
is a leak.
After workis done on the brake hydraulic system, make
sure the level is above the plastic seam, near the base
of
the filler neck.
6-34
-
With the wrong kindof fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work atall. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
NOTICE:
0
0
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage
brake system parts. For example, just a few
drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in your brakesystem can damage brake
system parts so badly that they’ll have to be
replaced. Don’t let someoneput inthe
wrong kind of fluid.
If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s
painted surfaces, the paintfinish can be
damaged. Be careful not to spill brake fluid
on your vehicle. If you do, washit off
immediately. See“Appearance Care” in
the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a
high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are
worn and new pads are needed. The sound may comeand
go or be heard all the timeyour vehicle is moving (except
when you are pushing on the brake pedalfirmly).
The brake wear warning sound means that soon
your brakeswon’t work well. That could leadto
an accident. Whenyou hear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
I NOTICE:
Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads
could result in costly brake repair.
6-35
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not meansomething is wrong with
your brakes.
The park brake system hasseparate brake linings that do
not self adjust for wear. If the park brake lever pulls up
more than the normal eighteenclicks, the parking brakes
may need adjustment.See your dealer.
When you havethe front brake padsreplaced, have
the rear brakes inspected, too.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Brake linings should alwaysbe replaced ascomplete
axle sets.
See “Brake System Inspection” in Section 7 of
this manual under PartC “Periodic Maintenance
Inspections.”
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealerif the brake pedaldoes not returnto
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your
disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely makea
moderate or heavier stop, then your brakes might not
adjust correctly.If you drive in that way, then -- very
carefully -- make a few moderate brakestops about
every 1,000 miles (1 600 km), so your brakes will
adjust properly.
6-36
The braking system ona modern vehicle is complex.
Its many parts have to be of top quality and work well
together if the vehicleis to have really goodbraking.
Your vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system -- for example, when your brake linings wear
down and youhave to have new ones put in -- be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts. If you
don’t, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For
example, if someone putsin brake linings that are wrong
for your vehicle, the balance between yourfront and
rear brakes can change-- for the worse. The braking
performance you’vecome to expect can change in many
other waysif someone puts inthe wrong replacement
brake parts.
Battery
Every new Chevrolet has a Delco [email protected]
You never have to add water to one of these. When it’s
time for a new battery, we recommenda Delco Freedom
battery. Get one that has the replacement number shown
on the original battery’s label.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
IA
CAUTION:
Batteries have acidthat can burnyou and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” in theIndex
for tips on workingaround a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your vehicle
for longer storage pe Ids.
Also, for your audio system, see “Theft-Deterrent
Feature” in the Index.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulb, see
“Replacement Bulbs” in the Index.
Halogen Bulbs
h
‘ C WTION:
-
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas insideand
can burst if you drop or scratch thebulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.
6-37
Headlamns
to the left
3. Press and turn the base a quarter-turn
(counterclockwise). (See arrows).
Before replacing a headlamp that does not
light, check
to make sure that the wiring connectoris securely
fastened to it.
See "Replacement Bulbs" in the Index to check type
of
headlamp you needto use before you begin to replace
the headlamp. You must replace a headlamp with
one
that is exactly the same.
1. Open the hood.
2. Locate the affected headlamp.
6-38
4. Remove the socket withthe burned lamp.
5. Replace the bulb andinsert the socket into
the headlamp.
Be careful not to move the aiming screws when you
replace the headlamp.If the headlamp being replaced
was properly aimed, the new one will
be also if it is
properly installed.
If your vehicle is damaged in an accident and the
headlamp aim seems to be affected, see your dealer.
Headlamps on damaged vehicles may require
recalibration of the horizontal aim by your dealer.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
Front Turn Signal
1. Using a screwdriver, remove the plastic screws from
the trap door under the vehicle. Move the trap door
out of the way.
2. Turn and pull out the socket and the bulb.
3. Pull out the bulb.
4. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
8
Replacing the bulb:
1. Remove the two screws in the stoplamp lens.
2. Gently pull the assembly out and remove the bulb
from the backof the assembly.
3. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
6-39
Rear Lamps
To change any rear bulb, you have to remove the
entire housing.
1. Remove the trim panel from the side that you are
replacing the bulb.
2. Pull the carpet back.
4. Pull the assembly off from the outside.
5. To remove a socket witha tab, press the tab and turn
the socketto the left (counterclockwise). To remove
a socket withouta tab, turnthe socket to the left
(counterclockwise).
6. To remove the bulb, pull the bulb from the socket.
7. Reverse the steps with a new bulb.
3. Remove the wing nuts.
6-40
RearSid
marker
I
3. Turn socket to theleft (counterclockwise) and pull
out the socketand the bulb.
Replacing a rear sidemarker bulb:
4. Reverse the steps with a new bulb,
1. Remove the screw from the sidemarker assembly.
2. To pull out the bulb housing, tilt the housing to
remove the tabbed end.
6-41
Wiper Blade Assembly Replacement
Replacement bladescome in different types andare
removed in different ways.
To remove the wiper blade assembly:
1. Lift the wiperarm until it locks into an
upright position.
2. Press the locking tab in while sliding the blade
assembly down.
Wiper Blade Element Replacement
6-42
To replace the wiper blade element, refer to the wiper
blade assembly replacement instructions.
To replace
the element follow these steps:
1. Locate the heel endof the wiper blade assembly that
has the two notches held
by the wiper blade claw.
2. Hold the wiper blade assembly with one hand and
pull the element gently with the other hand.
(Replacement blade elements have three plastic
caps which retain two metal flexor strips.
Do not
remove these caps before the element
is installed).
3. At the heel endof the wiper blade assembly, notched
end of blade element last, slide the blade element
into the blade claw sets. The plastic retainer caps
will be forced offas the elementis fully inserted.
Make sure that all the claw sets are properly engaged
in the slots of the blade element.
4. Install the wiper blade assembly on the wiper arm.
For information on wiper blade replacement length and
type, see “Capacities and Specifications’’ in the Index.
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see
your Chevrolet Warranty booklet for details.
’ Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
0 Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too muchfriction.
You could have an air-out and a serious
accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in
the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the same danger as
overloaded tires.The resulting accident
could causeserious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
0 Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured orbroken by a sudden
impact such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
0 Worn, oldtires can cause accidents. Ifyour
tread is badly worn,or if your tires have
been damaged,replace them.
See “Inflation Tire Pressure” in this section
for inflation pressure adjustment forhigher
speed driving.
0
--
--
6-43
Inflation
-- Tire Pressure
The Tire-Loading Information label, which is on the
driver’s door, shows thecorrect inflation pressures for
your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
If you’ll be driving at speeds higher than 100 mph
(160 km/h) where itis legal, raise the coldinflation
pressure of each tire to 35 psi (240 kPa). When you end
this very high-speed driving, reduce the coldinflation
pressures to thoselisted on the Tire-Loading
Information label.
6-44
NOTICE:
Don’t let anyone tell you
that underinflation or
overinflation isall right. It’s not. If your tires
don’t have enoughair (underinflation), you can
get the following:
Too much flexing
Too much heat
0 Tire overloading
0 Badwear
0 Bad handling
Bad fuel economy.
If your tires have too muchair (overinflation),
you can getthe following:
0 Unusualwear
0 Bad handling
Rough ride
0 Needless damage from road hazards.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first
rotation is the most important. See “Scheduled
Maintenance Services” in the Index for scheduled
rotation intervals.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
simply by lookrng at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
L
A
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 6,000 to 8,000 miles
(10 000 to 13 000 km). Any time you notice unusual
wear, rotate your tires as soon as possible and check
wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or
wheels. See “When It’s Timefor New Tires” and
“Wheel Replacement” later in this section for
more information.
If you don’t have P245/5OZR16Goodyear Eagle GS-C
tires or P275/4OZR17 Goodyear Eagle F1-GS tires, use
the rotation pattern shown above for your tires.
6-45
I1
+
-IIf you have P24950ZR16 Goodyear EagleGS-C tires
or P275/40ZR17 GoodyearEagle F1-GS tires, they
must roll in a certaindirection for the bestoverall
performance. The direction is shown by an arrowon
the sidewall. Because these tires
are directional, they
should be rotated as shown here. These tires should
only be movedfrom front to rear and rear to front on
the same side of the vehicle.
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
After the tires have beenrotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressuresas shown on the Tire-Loading
Information label. Make certain that allwheel nuts
are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque”in
the Index.
Rust or dirton a wheel, or on the partsto which
it is fastened, can make wheelnuts become loose
after a time.The wheel could comeoff and cause
an accident. When you change a wheel, remove
any rust or dirtfrom places wherethe wheel
attaches to the vehicle. In anemergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel todo this; but be
sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if you
need to, to get allthe rust or dirtoff. (See
“Changing aFlat Tire” in the Index.)
When It’s Time for New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires have
only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or
less of tread remaining.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
YOUcan see theindicators at three or more places
around the tire.
You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged deep
enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t berepaired well because of the size or location
of the damage.
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Tire-Loading Information label.
The tires installed on yourvehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
get ones withthat same TPC Spec number. That way
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
traction, ride and other things during normalservice on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC number will be followed by an “MS”
(for mud and snow).
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
6-47
Uniform
Mixing tires could cause youto lose control while
driving. If you mix tires of different sizes or types
(radial andbias-belted tires), the vehicle may not
handle properly, and you could have acrash.
Using tires of different sizes may also cause
damage to your vehicle.Be sure to use the same
size and type tires on all wheels.
It's all right to drive with your compact spare,
though. It was developedfor use on your vehicle.
If you use bic 'ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after
many milesof driving. A tire and/or wheel could
fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply
tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
6-48
'--I
Quality Grading
The following informationrelates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic SafetyAdministration, which gradestires by
treadwear, traction andtemperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold inthe United States.) The
grades are molded onthe sidewalls of most passenger
car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading system
does not applyto deep tread, winter-type snowtires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires availableon General Motors passenger
cars and light trucksmay vary with respect to these
grades, they must alsoconform to Federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
-- A, B, C
Treadwear
Temperature
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and maydepart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum requiredby law.
--
Traction A, B, C
The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are A, B,
and C , and they represent the tire’s ability to stopon
wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based
on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not
include cornering (turning) traction.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
6-49
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factoryto give you the longesttire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancingare
not needed. However, if you notice unusual
tire wear or
your vehicle pullingone way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted the
same way as theone it replaces.
If you need to replace anyof your wheels, wheelbolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new
GM original
equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the
right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor your
Chevrolet model.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel thatis bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. Ifwheelnutskeer>coming.loose.thewheel.
wheel bolts and wheel nutss h h d be &placed. If the
wheel leaks air, replaceit (except some aluminum
wheels, whichcan sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer if any of these conditions exist.
of wheel you need.
Your dealer will know the kind
6-50
I
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts
orwheelnutsonyourvehiclecanbedangerous.
It could affect the braking and handling
of your
vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you
lose control.You could have a collisionin which
you or others could be injured. Always use the
correct wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nutsfor
replacement.
I
I NOTICE:
rire Chains
~
The wrong wheelcan also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper
height, vehicleground clearance and tire or tire
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
See “Changing a Flat Tire” in the Index for more
information.
Putting a used wheel onyour vehicle is
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been usedor
how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause an accident. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
NOTICE:
If your vehicle has P235/55R16, P245/50ZR16or
P275/40ZR17 size tires, don’t use tire chains.
They can damage your vehicle because there’s
not enough clearance.
Use another type of traction device onlyif its
manufacturer recommends it foruse on your
vehicle and tiresize combinationand road
conditions. Followthat manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust orremove the
device if it’s contacting your vehicle, and don’t
spin your wheels.
NOTICE: (Continued)
6-51
NOTICE: (Continued)
If you do findtraction devices that will fit, install
them on the reartires.
If you have other tires, use tire chains only where
legal and only when you must. Use onlySAE
Class “S” type chains that arethe proper size for
your tires. Install them on the rear tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible withthe ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly
and follow the
chain manufacturer’s instructions. If you can
hear the chains contacting your vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If the contact continues,
slow downuntil it stops. Driving toofast or
spinning the wheels with chains on will damage
your vehicle.
Appearance Care
Remember, cleaning products canbe hazardous. Some
are toxic. Others can burst into flameyou
if strike a
match or get them on a hot
part of the vehicle. Some are
dangerous if you breathe theirfumes in a closedspace.
When you use anything from a containerto clean your
vehicle, be sure to follow the manufacturer’s warnings
and instructions. And always open your doors or
windows when you’re cleaning theinside.
Never use theseto clean your vehicle:
0
Gasoline
0
Benzene
Naphtha
CarbonTetrachloride
0
Acetone
0
PaintThinner
0
Turpentine
0
LacquerThinner
0
Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous-- some more than
too.
others -- and they can all damage your vehicle,
Don’t use any of these unlessthis manual says you can.
In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Alcohol
Laundry Soap
0
Bleach
0
ReducingAgents
Cleaning the Insideof Your Vehicle
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl or leather with a clean, damp cloth.
Your dealer has two cleaners, Multi-Purpose Interior
Cleaner and Capture Non-Solvent Dry Spot and Soil
Remover. They will clean normal spots and stains very
well. You can get GM-approved cleaning products from
your dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in
the Index.)
Here are some cleaning tips:
Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
0
Clean up stains as soon as you can -- before they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
Using Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner
on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section. Mask
surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Mix powdered cleaner following the directions on
the container label to form thick suds.
4. Use suds only and apply witha clean sponge. Don’t
saturate the material anddon’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a sponge
to remove the suds.
6 . Wipe cleaned area with a clean, damp towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a
clean area often. A soft brush may be usedif
stains are stubborn.
If a ring forms after spot cleaning, clean the entire
area immediately or it will set.
6-53
Spec-I
~
~
Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things ascatsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine and
blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excessstain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the multi-purpose interior
cleaner instructions described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with awaterhalung soda solution:
1 teaspoon ( 5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy,ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknownstains can be removedas follows:
1 . Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. First, clean with cool water and allow to
dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow instructions for
Multi-Purpose Interior Cleaner.
6-54
Fabric Protection
Your vehicle has upholstery and carpet
that has been
treated with Scotchgard" Fabric Protector, a 3M
product. It protectsfabrics by repelling oil and water,
which are the carriers of most stains. Even with this
protection, you still needto clean your upholstery and
carpet often to keepit looking new.
Further information on cleaningis available bycalling
1-800-433-3296 (in Minnesota, 1-800-642-6167).
Cleaning Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. You
may have to do it more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain
if you don't get themoff quickly. Use a clean cloth
and a vinyl/leather cleaner.See your dealerfor
this product.
Cleaning Leather
Cleaning Interior Plastic Components
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry witha soft cloth. Then, let the
leather dry naturally.Do not use heat to dry.
Use only a mild soap and water solutionon a soft
cloth or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
0
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
0
Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
0
Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the
finish, it can harm the leather.
Cleaning theTop of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones or
waxes may cause annoying reflections in the windshield
and even make itdifficult to see through the windshield
under certain conditions.
Do not bleacnor aye safety belts.If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild soap and
lukewarm water.
Cleaning Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often.
GM Glass Cleaner (GM
Part No. 1050427) or a liquid household glass cleaner
will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust films on
interior glass.
Don’t use abrasive cleanerson glass, because they may
cause scratches. Avoid placing decals on the inside rear
window, since they may haveto be scraped off later.
If abrasive cleaners are used on the inside of the rear
window, an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached across the
defogger grid.
Cleaning the Outsideof the
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by wiping
vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength windshield
washer solvent. Then rinse the blade with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them
as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth
at least every
six months. During very cold,
damp weather
more frequent application may be required. (See
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.)
Cleaning a RemovableRoof Panel
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield Special careis necessary when cleaning, removing
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
and/or storingthe roof panel.
wax, sapor other material maybe on the blade
Flush with water to remove dust and dirt, then dry
or windshield.
the panel.
Clean the outsideof the windshield with GM
Windshield Cleaner, Bon [email protected] Powder (non-scratching 0 Clean the panel with GM Glass Cleaner. Leave the
cleaner on the panelfor one minute, then wipe the
glass cleaning powder),GM Part No. 1050011. The
panel with a soft, lint-free cloth.
windshield is cleanif beads do not form when you
rinse it with water.
0 Don’t use abrasive cleaning materials.
6-56
Cleaning the Outsideof Your Vehicle
Cleaning ExteriorLampsLenses
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Use lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda liquid
hand, dish or vehicle washing (mild detergent) soapto
clean exterior lamps and lenses. Follow instructions
under “Washing Your Vehicle.”
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’sfinish is to
keep it clean by washingit often with lukewarmor
cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays ofthe sun.
Don’t use strong soapsor chemical detergents. Use
liquid hand, dish or car washing (mild detergent) soaps.
You can get GM-approved cleaning productsfrom your
dealer. (See “Appearance Care and Materials” in the
Index.) Don’t use cleaning agents that
are petroleum
based, or that contain acidor abrasives. All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowed to
dry on the surface,or they could stain. Dry the finish
with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint
finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. (See “AppearanceCare and Materials”
in the Index.)
Your Chevrolet has a “basecoatklearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss
to the
colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes
that are non-abrasive and made fora basecoatklearcoat
paint finish.
NOTICE:
Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on
a basecoatklearcoat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
6-57
Foreign materials suchas calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicleas soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfacesare subject to aging, weather
and chemicalfallout that can take their toll over a period
of years. You can help to keep the paintfinish looking
new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Cleaning Your Convertible Top
Your convertible top shouldbe cleaned often. If you use
an automatic car wash, use one with waterjets and
hanging cloths. High pressure car washes may cause
water to enter your vehicle.
When you hand wash thetop, do it in partial shade.
Use a mild soap, lukewarm water and a soft sponge. A
chamois or cloth may leavelint on the top, and a brush
can chafe the threadsin the top fabric. Don’t use
detergents, harshcleaners, solvents or bleachingagents.
6-58
Wet the entire vehicle and wash the top evenly
to avoid
spots or rings. Let the soap remain on the
fabric for a
few minutes. When the top is really dirty, use
a mild
foam-type cleaner. Thoroughlyrinse the entire vehicle,
then let the top dry in
direct sunlight.
To protect the convertible top:
0
After you wash the vehicle, make sure the top is
completely dry beforeyou lower it.
0
Don’t get any cleaner on the vehicle’s paintedfinish;
it could leave streaks.
0
If you decide to go through an automatic car wash, ask
the manager if the equipment could damage your top.
Cleaning Aluminum or Chrome
Wheels (If Equipped)
Keep your wheels clean using soft
a clean cloth with
mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with soft
a clean towel. A wax
may then be applied.
The surface of these wheelsis similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners or
abrasive cleaning brushes onthem because you could
damage the surface. You may use chrome polish on
chrome wheels, but avoid any painted surface of the
wheel, and buff off immediately
after application.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash
that has silicon carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to theparts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may developinto a majorrepair expense.
Cleaning Tires
Minor chips and scratches canbe repaired with touch-up
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with a tire cleaner. materials available
from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
NOTICE:
1
When applying a tire dressing always take care to
wipe off any oversprayor splash from all painted
surfaces on the body or wheels of the vehicle.
Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish.
6-59
Underbody Maintenance
ical Pail
.
.1PC
..
hg
Chemicals usedfor ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur onthe
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan
and exhaust system eventhough they have
corrosion protection.
Some weather and atmosphericconditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon
and attack paintedsurfaces on your vehicle.This
damage can take two forms: blotchy, ringlet-shaped
discolorations, and smallirregular dark spots etched
into the paint surface.
At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and other debris can collect. Dirt packed inclosed areas
of the frame should beloosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbodycar washing system cando
this for you.
Although no defect inthe paint job causes this,
Chevrolet will repair,at no charge to the owner, the
surfaces of new vehicles damagedby this fallout
condition within 12 monthsor 12,000 miles (20 000 km)
of purchase, whichever occursfirst.
6-60
Appearance Care Materials Chart
I
I
I
1050172
SIZE
in.
23 x 25 in.
16 oz. (0.473 L)
16 oz. (0.473 L)
DESCRIPTION
Polishing
Cloth - Wax
Treated
USAGE
Exterior
polishing
cloth
_____
Tar
and
Road
Oil
Remover
Removes
tar,
road
oil
and
asphat
ChromeCleanerandPolishUse
onchrome,stainlesssteel,nickel,copperand
brass
1050173
1050174
16 oz. (0.473 L)
WhiteSidewallTireCleanerRemovessoilandblackmarksfromwhitewalls
32 oz. (0.946 L)
Vinyl
Cleaner
Cleans
vinyl
tops,
uphokeryand convertibletops
23 oz. (0.680 L)
Glass
Cleaner
Removes
dirt, grime,
smoke
fingerprints
and
_ Cleans and lightly waxes
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wash
Wax Concentrate
Protects leather, wood, acrylics, Plexiglas
m , plastic,
1052918**
8 oz. (0.237 L)
Annor All” Protectant
rubber and vinyl
Multi-PurposeInteriorCleanscarpets,seats,interiortrim,doorpanels
1052925
16 oz. (0.473 L)
mats
floor
and
Cleaner
1052929
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Wheel
Cleaner
water
rinse
with
and
Spray
on
Capture Dry Spot Remover
1052930
8 02. (0.237 L)
Attracts, absorbs and removes soils
Cleans and shines a variety
12345002
of surface types
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Armor All Cleaner
12345721
Synthetic
Chamois
Shines
vehicle
without
scratching
2.5 sq. ft.
Spray on tire shine
12345725
12 oz. (0.354 L)
Silicone Tire Shine
12377964
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust, fingerprints and surface contaminants
16 oz. (0.473 L)
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratchesand oxidation and protects finish
12377966
16 oz. (0.473 L)
12377984
Surface Cleaner
Removes contaminants, blemishes and swirl marks
16 oz. (0.473 L)
See your General Motors Parts Department for these products.
**Not recommended for use on instrument panel vinyl.
See “Fluids and Lubricants” in the Index.
~
~
~~
-
.
~
I
I
TM
I
-_-
,
_ _ . ~
-
-.-
6-61
the model designation,
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
paint information and
0
L1
a list of all production options andspecial
equipment.
Be sure thatthis label is not removedfrom the vehicle.
Electrical System
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle.It appears on
a plate in thefront corner of the instrument panel,
on the
driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts
labels and the certificatesof title and registration.
Engine Identification
The 8th characterin your VIN is the engine
code. This
code will help you identify your engine, specifications
and replacement parts.
Ad(
iquipment
r-
NOTICE:
i
Don’t add anything electricalto your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t
be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working
as
they should.
Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label inside your console storage
compartment. It’s very helpful if you ever need
to order
parts. On this label is:
yourVIN,
Your vehicle has anair bag system. Before attemptingto
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see “Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Chevrolet” in the Index.
Headlamps
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The headlamp wiring is protected by a circuit breaker.
An electrical overload will cause the lamps to go on
and off, or in some cases to remain off. If this happens,
have your headlamp wiring checked
right away.
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected
from short circuits by a combination offuses, circuit
breakers, and fusible thermal links in the wiring itself.
This greatly reduces the chance offires caused by
electrical problems.
Windshield Wipers
The windshield wiper motoris protected by acircuit
breaker and afuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper willstop until the motor cools. If
the overload is caused by some electrical problem and
not snow, etc., be sure to getit fixed.
Power Windows and Other Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and
other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problemis fixed or goes away.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the
fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace thefuse. Be sure you
replace a badfuse with a newone of the correct size.
If you ever have a problem on
the road and don’t have a
spare fuse, you can borrowone of the correct value. Just
pick some feature of your vehicle that you can
get along
without -- like the radio or cigarette lighter -- and use
its fuse, if it is thesize you need. Replace itas soon as
you can.
6-63
FUSE USAGE CHART
1
i l l
2
1
1-1
5
6
TAIL LPS
1
GAUGES
1
0
7
0
8
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1 4 [ 1
BATT WIPER/WASH
6
DIMMER
IP
0
1
2
0
DEFOGISEATS
CIGIACCY
AIR BAG
IGN
0
COURTESY
ACCY
PWR
HVAC
1-9
Q
SO
RADIO ACCY
STOPIHAZARD
TURN
BIU
R
ACCY
I 7
1
5
0
WINDOWS
17
I
RADIO
Fuse
Usage
STOP/HAZARDHazard Flasher, Brake
Switch Assembly
Traction ControVSecond Gear
TURN B/U
Start Switch, Back-up Lamp
Switch, Turn Flasher, Daytime
Running Lamps(Dm) Module
RADIO ACCY
6-64
Delco Monsoon Radio Amplifier,
Remote CD Player (Trunk)
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
TAIL LPS
Daytime Running Lamps(DRL)
Module, Headlamp Switch
DEFOGEEATS
Rear Defogger Switch/Timer,
Power Seats
HVAC
HVAC Selector Switch, Rear
Defogger SwitcWTimer
WIPEWASH
Wiper Motor Assembly,
Wipermasher Switch
PWR ACCY
Park Lamp Relay, Hatch Release
Relay, Power Mirror Switch,
Radio, Shock Sensor, Instrument
Cluster
WINDOWS
Power Windows Switch (RH,LH),
Express Down Module,
Convertible Top Switch
IP DIMMER
Door Illumination Lamp(LH,
RH), Headlamp Switch, Fog
Lamp Switch, Instrument Cluster,
HVAC Control Assembly, PRNDL
Illumination Lamp, Ashtray
Lamp, Radio, Steering Wheel
Controls-Radio, Rear Window
Defogger Switch/Timer, Traction
Control (ASR) Second Gear
Start Switch
RADIO
Body Control Module(BCM),
Radio, Amplifier, Steering Wheel
Controls-Radio
COURTESY
Body Control Module (BCM)
GAUGES
Body Control Module (BCM),
Brake Switch Assembly (BTSI),
Instrument Cluster, Daytime
Running Lamps (DRL) Module,
Auxiliary Accessory Wire
AIR BAG
Air Bag System, DualPole
Arming Sensor
CIG/ACCY
Cigarette Lighter, Data Link
Connector (DLC), Auxiliary
Accessory Wire
6-65
Underhood Electrical Center Fuses
ABS BAT SOL
TCS BAT
COOL FAN
PCM BAT
FUEL PUMP
AIR PUMP
000
LH HOW OR
RH HDLP DR
HORN
15305529 A
r
FAN $43
1
L
1
--- 1
-
Fuse and Relay Center
1
The two underhood fuse and relay centers are located
in the engine compartment. Open the coverto expose
the fuses.
6-66
Fuse
Usage
ABS BAT SOL
Anti-Lock Brake System
TCS BAT
Traction Control System
COOL FAN
Cooling Fan Control
PCM BAT
Powertrain Control Module
FUEL PUMP
Fuel Pump
AIR PUMP
Air Pump Relay and Bleed Valve
Fuse
Usage
LH HDLP
Headlamp Door and Module
RH HDLP
Headlamp Door and Module
HORN
Horn Relay
ABS BAT-1
Anti-Lock Brake System Module
H/L DRHORN
Horn and Headlamp Doors
ABS BAT-2
Anti-Lock Brake and
Traction
Control System
COOL FAN
Cooling Fan Relays
SEN
ENG
INJ
INJ
on0
on0
STRTR
ENG CTRL
HORN
COOLING FAN#3
z
A/C CRUISE
FRC 2
Fuse and Relay Center2
Fuse
Usage
INJ
Fuel Injectors (Not Used for V6)
(LH Injectors for V8 and
Ignition Module)
INJ
Fuel Injectors (All for V6)
(LH Injectors for V8 and
Ignition Module)
COOLING FAN #2
COOLING FAN#1
PCM
IGN
15305530 A
Relay
FOG LAMP
ABS IGN
6-67
Fuse
Usage
Fuse
Usage
ENG SEN
Mass Air Flow, Heated Oxygen
Sensor, Skip Shift Solenoid (V8
Only), Reverse Lockout Solenoid,
Brake Switch
I/P- 1
HVAC Blower Control and Relay
IGN
Ignition Switch, Relay and Starter
Enable Relay
UP-2
Instrument Panel Fuse Center
STRTR
Powertrain Control Module and
Clutch Pedal Switch
Relay
ABS IGN
Anti-Lock Brake System Module
AIR SOL
PCM IGN
Powertrain Control Module
AIR PUMP
ENG CTRL
Ignition Module (V6 Only),
Automatic Transmission and
Charcoal Canister Purge Solenoid
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor Relay,
Cruise Control Switches and Module
STARTER
A/CCRUISE
ENG CTRL
6-68
Engine Controls, Fuel Pump, PCM,
A.I.R. and Cooling Fans
FUEL PUMP
IGN
Replacement Bulbs
Back-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3155
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 1
Front Parking and Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157K
Headlamp (Low-Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Headlamp (High-Beam) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Sidemarker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
194
TailOnly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3057
Tail/Stop/Turn ..........................
Capacities and Specifications
Engine
Type
V6
VIN Engine Code K ......................
VIN Engine Code G ......................
V8
Fuel Injection
Fuel Delivery ....................
Valve Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Head
Piston Displacement
VIN Engine Code K . . . . . . . . . 23 1 CID (3791 cc)
VIN Engine Code G . . . . . . . . . 350 CID (5735cc)
Firing Order
VIN Engine Code K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6-5-4-3-2
VIN Engine Code G . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8-7-2-6-5-4-3
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . 100 lb-ft (140 Nnm)
Thermostat Temperature
Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180°F (82°C)
Windshield WiperBlade Replacement
hook
Type .................................
24 inches (610 cm)
Length ....................
Capacities (Approximate)
The following approximatecapacities are given in
U.S. and metric conversions. ....... Please refer to
“Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
in the Index for more information.
Air Conditioning? . . . . . . . . . . . . See the refrigerant
information label under the hood.
Automatic Transmission
Drain and Refill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 quarts (4.7 L)*
Overhaul
VIN Engine Code K . . . . . . 8.8 quarts (8.3 L)*
VIN Engine Code G . . . . 10.8 quarts (10.2L)*
Cooling System
VIN Engine CodeK
With Manual Transmission . . 12.5 quarts (11.8L)
With Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 quarts (11.6 L)
VIN Engine CodeG
With Manual Transmission . 15.3 quarts (14.5 L)
With Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 quarts. (14.3 L)
Crankcase
With Oil andFilter Change
3800 (VIN K) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 quarts (4.2 L)**
5.7L (VIN G) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 quarts (5.2 L)**
Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15.5 gallons (58.7L)
Manual Transmission
Five-Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 quarts (3.2 L)*
Six-Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 quarts (3.8 L)*
Rear Axle Lubricant . . . . . . . . . 1.75 quarts (1.7 L)
*
Recheck fluid level after filling. See “Automatic
Transmission Fluid”or “Manual Transmission Fluid”
in the Index.
** Recheck the
in the Index.
6-70
oillevel after filling. See “Engine Oil”
Vehicle Dimensions
Length
193.5 inches (49 1.5 cm)
Width
74.1 inches (1 88.3cm)
Height
51.3 inches (130.3 cm)
Wheelbase
101.1 inches (256.6 cm)
Front Tread
60.7 inches (154.1cm)
Rear Tread
60.6 inches (153.9 cm)
Air Conditioning Refrigerants
Not all air conditioning refrigerants are the same.
If the air conditioning system in your vehicle needs
refrigerant, be sure the proper refrigerant is used. If
you’re not sure, ask your dealer.
Replacement Parts
Air Cleaner Filter ......................
A1163C
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..75-60
Engine Oil Filter
PF47
VIN Engine Code K ....................
VIN Engine Code G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PF25
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GF578
PCV Valve
VIN Engine Code K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV892C
VIN Engine Code G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CV895C
Radiator Cap ...........................
RC24
Spark Plug
VIN Engine Code K . . , . 41-921 (0.060 inch Gap)
VIN Engine Code G . . . . 41-931 (0.060 inch Gap)
6-71
b
6-72
NOTES
0 Section 7
MaintenanceSchedule
This section covers themaintenance required for your Chevrolet. Your vehicle needs these services to retain its safety,
dependability and emission control performance.
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-6
Your Vehicle and the Environment
How This Section is Organized
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
Short TripKity Definition
Short TripKity Intervals
Long TripKity Definition
7-6
7-32
7-36
7-37
7-39
Long TripKity Intervals
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections
Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Part E: Maintenance Record
7-1
I
HI
IMPORTANT:
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER
LEVEL AND CHANGE AS
RECOMMENDED
protection
Plan
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan ? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warrantyand Owner Assistance booklet, or your
Chevrolet dealerfor details.
7-2
Introduction
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good workingcondition, but also helpsthe
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improperfluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle.To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle ingood
condition, please maintain yourvehicle properly.
How This Sectionis Organized
The remainder of this section is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” shows
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you should
let your dealer’s service department or another qualified
service center do these jobs.
A CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In tryingto do some jobs, you can
be seriouslyinjured. Do your own maintenance
work onlyif you havethe required know-how
and the propertools and equipment for the job.
If you have any doubt, have a qualified
technician do the work.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells
you what shouldbe checked and when.It also explains
what you can easilydo to help keep yourvehicle in
good condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”
explains important inspections that your dealer’s
service department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”
lists some recommended products to helpkeep your
vehicle properly maintained. These products, or their
equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work
yourself or have itdone.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” provides a place
for you to record the maintenance performed on your
vehicle. Whenever any maintenance is performed, be
sure to write it down inthis part. This will help you
determine when your nextmaintenance should be done.
In addition, it is a good idea to keep your maintenance
receipts. They may be neededto qualify your vehiclefor
warranty repairs.
If you are skilled enough to do some work on your
vehicle, you will probably wantto get the service
information. See “Service and Owner Publications”
in the Index.
-
7-3
Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors wantto help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we don’t know exactly
how you’ll drive it.You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long
distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather.
You
may use your vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may
drive it to work,to do errands orin many other ways.
Because of all thedifferent ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may even need
more frequent checks and replacements than you’ll
find
in the schedules in this section.So please read this
section and note how you drive.
If you have any
questions on howto keep your vehicle in good
condition, see your Chevrolet dealer.
This part tells you the maintenance services you should
have done and when you should schedule them.If you
go to your dealerfor your service needs, you’ll know
that GM-trained and supported service people will
perform the work using genuine GM parts.
7-4
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoeverservices your vehicle
uses these. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you
or anyone else
drives the vehicle.
These schedules arefor vehicles that:
0
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find theselimits on your vehicle’s
Tire-Loading Information label. See “Loading
Your Vehicle’’ inthe Index.
0
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
0
use the recommended fuel. See “Fuel” in the Index.
Selecting the Right Schedule
First you’ll need to decide which of the two schedulesis
right for your vehicle. Here’s howto decide which
schedule to follow:
Maintenance Schedule
I Short Trip/City Definition
1
Follow the Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule if any
one of these conditions is true foryour vehicle:
a Most trips are less than 5 to 10 miles (8 to 16 km).
This is particularly important when outside
temperatures are below freezing.
a Most trips include extensive idling (such as frequent
driving in stop-and-go traffic).
a Most trips are through dusty areas.
a You frequently tow a trailer or use a carrier on top of
your vehicle.
a If the vehicle is used for delivery service, police, taxi
or other commercial application.
One of the reasons you should follow this schedule if
you operate your vehicle under any of these conditions
is that these conditions cause engine oil to break
down soonex
Short Trip/City Intervals
Every 3,000 Miles (5 000 km): Engine Oil andFilter
Change (or 3 months, whichever occurs first).
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Tire Rotation.
Every 6,000 Miles (10 000 km) of Trailering: Rear
Axle Fluid Change (Vehicles TowingTrailers).
At the First6,000 Miles (10 000 km): Rear Axle Fluid
Change (Limited-Slip Differential).
Every 15,000 Miles (25 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Inspection, if driving in dusty conditions. Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank,Cap and Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100 000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
7-5
Maintenance Schedule
Trip/City
IIntervals
Short
I
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km): Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to follow the complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
Follow this maintenance scheduleonly if none of the
conditions from the Short Trip/City Maintenance
Schedule is true. Do not use this scheduleif the vehicle
is used for trailer towing, drivenin a dusty area or used
off paved roads. Usethe Short Trip/City schedule for
these conditions.
Driving a vehicle with a h l l y warmed engine under
highway conditions causes engine oil to break
down slower.
.
Long Tripmighway Intervals
Every 7,500 Miles (12500 km): Engine Oil and Filter
Change (or every12 months, whichever occurs first).
Tire Rotation.
At the First7,500 Miles (12500 km): Rear Axle Fluid
Change (Limited-Slip Differential).
Every 15,000 Miles (25
000 km):Automatic
Transmission Service (severe conditions only).
Every 30,000 Miles (50 000 km): Air Cleaner Filter
Replacement. Fuel Tank, Cap and
Lines Inspection.
Every 50,000 Miles (83 000 km): Automatic
Transmission Service (normal conditions).
Every 60,000 Miles (100000 km): Engine Accessory
Drive Belt Inspection.
Every 100,000 Miles (166000 km): Spark Plug Wire
Inspection. Spark Plug Replacement.
Every 150,000 Miles (240000 km):Cooling System
Service (or every60 months, whichever occurs first).
These intervals only summarize maintenance services.
Be sure to followthe complete maintenance schedule on
the following pages.
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000miles
(166 000 km) should be performed after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 km).
See “Owner Checks and Services” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections” following.
I
Footnotes
L
t The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty orlimit recall liability priorto the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life.
We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenanceservices be
performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
+A
good timeto check your brakesis during tire
rotation. See “Brake System Inspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections”in Part C of
this schedule.
7-7
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
3,000 Miles (5 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I
I
I
6,000 Miles (10 000 km)
0 Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
MILEAGE
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote+.)
0 Change the rear axlegear lubricant if vehicle is usedto pull a traileror has
limited-slip differential.
9,000 Miles ( I 5 000 km)
I
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I
12,000 Miles (20 000 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change the rear axle gearlubricant if vehicle is usedto pull a trailer.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
7-8
I
DATE
I
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) orhigher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, policeor delivery service.
r f you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the-fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
DATE
1
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
18,000 Miles (30 000 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is usedto pull a trailer.
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY I
I
I SERVICEDBY I
7-9
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
21,000 Miles (35 000 km)
0 Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
DATE
1
ACTUAL I SERVICEDBY: I
MILEAGE
I
I
24,000 Miles (40 000 km)
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant
if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
27,000 Miles (45 000 km)
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change the rear axle gearlubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
7-10
DATE
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
I
SERVICED B Y
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi,police or delivery service.
I f you donot use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
33,000 Miles (55 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
MILEAGE
7-11
1
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
36,000 Miles (60 000 km)
DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service,
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricantif vehicle is used to pulla trailer.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in
the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
39,000 Miles (65 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
42,000 Miles (70000 km)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I SERVICEDBY: I
I DATE
I
DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Change the rear axle gearlubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
7-12
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
r
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more ofthese conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
I f you donot use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
48,000 Miles (80 000 km)
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
DATE
ACTUAL .
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
7-13
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
I
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both thefluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
51,000 Miles (85 000 km)
SERVICED BY:
I
DATE
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
I
54,000 Miles (90 000 km)
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote+.)
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant
if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
57,000 Miles (95 000 km)
0 Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-14
I
I
1
I
DATE
SERVICED BY:
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
DATE
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
Ifyou do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines fordamage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
7-15
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
63,000 Miles (105 000 km)
I7 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
66,000 Miles (110 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle i s used to pull a trailer.
69,000 Miles (115 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
72,000 Miles (120 000 km)
CI
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
Change the rear axle gear lubricantif vehicle is usedto pull a trailer.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
7-16
I DATE
I
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
I DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
I SERVICEDBY:
I
I
Short TripKity Maintenance Schedule
I
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
I DATE
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (orevery 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle underany of these conditions, change thefluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Inspect air cleaner filter if you are driving in dusty conditions. Replace
filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
O
78,000 Miles (130 000 km)
3
DATE
Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Change the rear axle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
7-17
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
1
81,000 Miles (I35 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
84,000 Miles (140 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Change the rear axle gearlubricant if vehicle is used to pulla trailer.
Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern and additional infc lation. (See footnote +.)
87,000 Miles (145000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
7-18
I
DATE
:
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
DATE
MILEAGE
I DATE
I
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Change
engine oiland filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
Change the rearaxle gear lubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32O C ) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
I DATE
I
1
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
7-19
I
ShortTrip/CityMaintenanceSchedule
I
93,000 Miles (155000 km)
DATE
I
DATE
I
Change engine oil andfilter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
96,000 Miles (160 000 km)
Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission ControlService.
0 Change the rear axle gearlubricant if vehicle is used to pull a trailer.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation”in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote
+.)
99,000 Miles (165 000 km)
0 Change engineoil and filter (or every 3 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
7-20
MILEAGE
I
Short Trip/City Maintenance Schedule
I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
I DATE
I
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
Cl If you haven’t used your vehicle undersevere service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
DATE
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See “Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-21
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
The services shown inthis schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 lux) should be performedafter 100,000miles
(166 000 km)at the same intervals. The services shown
at 150,000 miles (240 000 km) should be performed at
the same interval after 150,000 miles (240 000 krn).
See “Owner Checks andServices” and “Periodic
Maintenance Inspections”following.
Footnotes
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that
the
failure to performthis maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warrantyor limit recall liability priorto the
completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommendedmaintenance services be
performed at the indicatedintervals and the maintenance
be recorded.
+ A good time to check your brakesis during tire
rotation. See “Brake SystemInspection” under
“Periodic Maintenance Inspections” inPart C of
this schedule.
7-22
mip/Higl
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
Cl Change the rear axle gear lubricant if the vehicle haslimited-slip differential.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
I
MILEAGE
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the jluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern and additional information.(See footnote +.)
MILEAGE
7-23
’
ong Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
I
22,500 Miles (37 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation’’ in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occursfirst).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where theoutside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace air cleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
7-24
I DATE
I
MILEAGE
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
I SERVICEDBY: I
J
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
DATE
0 Change engine oiland filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
45,000 Miles (75 000 km)
I
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
I
I SERVICEDBY I
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one ormore of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
(Continued)
7-25
Long Tripktighway Maintenance Schedule
45,000 Miles (75000 km) (Continued)
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
lf you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change thefluid
and filter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe
conditions listed previously and,
therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both the
fluid and filter.
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
17 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Sewice.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in theIndex for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
7-26
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
I
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
I
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly
reaches 90°F
(32°C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these conditions, chang,e thcD fluid
andJiEter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
0 Replace air cleanerfilter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replace parts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?.)
DATE
MILEAGE
ACTUAL
I SERVICED BY:
-
7-27
Long Tripmighway Maintenance Schedule
67,500 Miles (I12 500 km)
Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” inthe Index for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
759000Miles (125 000 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmissionfluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you do not use your vehicle under anyof these conditions, change the
fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
O
7-28
DATE
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
DATE
MILEAGE
SERVICED BY:
Long TripMighway Maintenance Schedule
1
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
I DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index for proper
rotation pattern and additional information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
ACTUAL
MILEAGE
I
SERVICED BY:
DATE
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first),
An Emission Control Service.
0 Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature regularly reaches 90°F
(32 O C) or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery service.
If you donot use your vehicle under any of these conditions, change the fluid
andfilter every 50,000 miles (83 000 km).
(Continued)
7-29
Long Trip/Highway Maintenance Schedule
I
90,000 Miles (150 000 km) (Continued)
Replace aircleaner filter.
An Emission Control Service.
0 Inspect fuel tank, cap and lines for damage or leaks. Inspect fuel cap gasket
for any damage. Replaceparts as needed.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote?’.)
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspectionand Rotation” in the Indexfor proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Change engine oil and filter (or every 12 months, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See “Tire Inspection and Rotation” in the Index
for proper
rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)
7-30
DATE
I
100,000 Miles (166 000 km)
DATE
0 Inspect spark plug wires.
I
An Emission Control Service.
0 Replace spark plugs.
An Emission Control Service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service conditions listed
previously and, therefore, haven’t changed your automatic transmission
fluid, change both the fluid and filter. Manual transmission fluid doesn’t
require change.
150,000 Miles (240 000 km)
DATE
0 Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every 60 months since last service,
whichever occurs first). See“Engine Coolant” in the Index for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap and neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
An Emission Control Service.
7-31
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Engine Coolant Level Check
Listed below are owner checks andservices which
should be performed at the intervals specified to help
ensure the safety, dependability and emissioncontrol
performance of your vehicle.
Check the engine coolant level and add [email protected]
coolant mixture if necessary. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Indexfor further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Be sure any necessaryrepairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary. See
“Windshield Washer Fluid”in the Index for further details.
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is importantfor you or a service station attendant to
pegorm these underhood checks at eachfielfill.
Tire Inflation Check
Make suretires are inflated tothe correct pressures. See
“Tires” inthe Index for further details.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the properoil if
necessary. See “Engine Oil” in the Index for
further details.
7-32
Cassette Deck Service
Clean cassette deck. Cleaning shouldbe done every
50 hours of tape play. See “Audio Systems” in the
Index for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Lookfor any other loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep a safety belt system from doing its job,have it
repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have themrepaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not needregular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replace blade
inserts that appear worn or damaged or that streak or
m i s s areas of the windshield. Also see “Wiper Blades,
Cleaning” in the Index.
Manual Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed. See
“Manual Transmission” in the Index. Check for leaks.
A fluid loss may indicate a problem. Have the system
inspected and repaired if needed.
Automatic Transmission Check
Check the transmission fluid level; add if needed.See
“Automatic Transmission” in the Index. A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair if
needed.
Hydraulic Clutch System Check
Check the fluid level in the clutch reservoir. See
“Hydraulic Clutch Fluid” in the Index. A fluid loss
in this system couldindicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired at once.
At Least Once aYear
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all hinges andlatches, including those for the
hood, rear compartment, console doors and any folding
seat hardware. Part D tells you whatto use. More
frequent lubrication may be required whenexposed to
a corrosive environment.
7-33
Starter Switch Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start,be sure youhave enough room
around the vehicle.
Brake-Transmission Shift Interlock
(BTSI) Check
(Automatic Transmission)
When you are doing this( !ck, the vehicle could
move suddenly.If it does, you or others could be
injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start,be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.It should be parked on a
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake(see “Parking
level surface.
Brake” in the Index if necessary) and the regular brake.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake(see “Parking Brake”
NOTE: Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be
in the Index if necessary).
ready to turn off the engine immediately if
it starts.
NOTE: Be ready to apply the regular brake
to start the
3. On automatic transmission vehicles, try
immediately if the vehicle beginsto move.
engine in each gear.The starter should work only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the starter works in
3. With the engine off, turnthe key to the RUN
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, tryto move the shiftlever out of
On manual transmission vehicles,put the shiftlever
PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever
in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway
moves out of PARK(P), your vehicle’s BTSI
and try to start the engine.The starter should work
needs service.
only when the clutch is pushed down all the way
to
the floor.If the starter works when the clutch isn’t
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
7-34
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and withthe parking brake set, tryto turn
the ignition keyto LOCK in each shift lever position.
With an automatic transmission, the key should turn
to LOCK only when the shiftlever is in PARK (P).
With a manual transmission, the key should turn to
LOCK only when theshift lever is in REVERSE (R).
On vehicles with a key release button,try to turn the key
to LOCK without pressingthe button. The key should
turn to LOCK only when you pressthe key button.
Park on a fairlysteep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping yourfoot on the regular brake,
set the parlung brake.
To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure
from the regular brake pedal.Do this until the
vehicle is held by the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release all brakes.
On all vehicles, the key should come out only in LOCK.
Underbody Flushing Service
Parking Brake andAutomatic Transmission
PARK (P) Mechanism Check
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials fromthe underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
A CATJTION:
When you are doing this checkyour vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property
could be damaged.Make
sure thereis room in frontof your vehicle in case
it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle beginto move.
7-35
Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they are
cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect
all pipes, fittings
Listed below are inspections and services which should be and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the outside of the
performed at least twice a year (for instance, each spring radiator and air conditioning condenser.To help ensure
and fall). You should let your dealer’s service department
proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and
or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure
pressure cap is recommended at least once a year.
any necessary repairsare completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual.See “Service andOwner
Publications” in the Index.
Steering and Suspension Inspection
Inspect thefront and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, looseor missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc.
Exhaust System Inspection
Throttle System Inspection
Inspect the throttle system for interference or binding, and fo
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed. Replace
any components that have high effort or excessive Do
wear.
not lubricate accelerator and cruise control cables.
Rear Axle Service
Check the gear lubricant level in the rear axle and add
if
needed. See “Rear Axle” in the Index.
A fluid loss may
indicate a problem. Check the axle and repair
if needed.
it
Brake System Inspection
Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and hoses
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body nearfor proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
the exhaust system.Look for broken, damaged,missing or
Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
out-of-position parts as well as open seams, holes, loose
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
connections or other conditions which could cause a heat parking brake, etc. Check parking brake adjustment.
You
build-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumes into
may need to have your brakes inspected more often your
if
the vehicle. See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
driving habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
7-36
Part D: Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants
I
USAGE
Hydraulic Brake
System
NOTE: Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number or specification may be obtainedfrom
your dealer.
USAGE
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Engine Oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For
Gasoline Engines “Starburst”
symbol of the proper viscosity. To
determine the preferred viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
“Engine Oil” in the Index.
50/50 mixture of clean water
(preferably distilled) and use only
GM [email protected]@
or [email protected]@
Coolant. See “Engine Coolant” in
the Index.
I
FLUIDLUBRICANT
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
(GM Part No. 12377967 or
equivalent DOT- 3 Brake Fluid).
@
Hydraulic Clutch Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (GM Part
System
No. 12345347 or equivalent
DOT-3 Brake Fluid).
Power Steering
System
GM Power Steering Fluid (GM
Part No. 1052884 - 1 pint,
1050017 - 1 quart, or equivalent).
Manual
Transmission
[email protected]
Transmission Fluid.
Automatic
Transmission
[email protected]
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
7-37
USAGE
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Engine Oil.
Floor Shift
Linkage
Lubriplate’ Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2
Category LB or GC-LB.
Rear Axle
(Standard
Differential)
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345977) or SAE 8OW-90
GL-5 Gear Lubricant.
Rear Axle
(Limited-Slip
Differential)
Axle Lubricant (GM Part
No. 12345977) and 4 ounces
(1 18 ml)of Limited-Slip
Differential Lubricant Additive
(GM Part No. 1052358 or
equivalent) where required.
See “Rear Axle” in the Index.
7-38
USAGE
FLUIDLUBRICANT
~~~
FLUID/LUBRICANT
Windshield
Washer Solvent
GM Optikleen’ Washer Solvent
(GM Part No. 1051515) or
equivalent.
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Pivots, Spring
Anchor and
Release Pawl
Lubriplate’ Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. 12346293 or
equivalent) or lubricant meeting
requirements of NLGI # 2,
Category LBor GC-LB.
~
Hood and Door
Hinges
Multi-Pu ose Lubricant,
Superlube
% (GM Part
No. 12346241 or equivalent).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM
Part No. 12345579 or equivalent).
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading and who performedthe service
in the boxes provided after the maintenance interval.
Any additional information from “Owner Checks and
Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” canbe added on
the following record pages. Also, you should retainall
maintenance receipts. Your owner information portfolio
is a convenient place to store them.
Maintenance Record
DATE
ODOMETER
READING
SERVICED BY
MAINTENANCE PERFORMED
7-39
Maintenance Record
7-40
a Section 8
CustomerAssistanceInformation
Here you will find out how to contact Chevrolet if you need assistance. This section also tells you how to obtain
service publications and how to report any safety defects.
8-2
8-4
8-5
8-7
8-8
8-9
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone
(TTY)Users
Chevrolet Roadside Assistance Program
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Courtesy Transportation
GM Participation in an Alternative Dispute
Resolution Program
8- 10
8- 10
8-11
8-1 1
8-11
Warranty Information
Reporting Safety Defects to the United
States Government
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors
Ordering Service and OwnerPublications
in Canada
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Chevrolet dealers have thefacilities, trained technicians
and up-to-date information to promptly address any
concerns you may have. However,
if a concern has not
been resolvedto your completesatisfaction, take the
following steps:
STEP ONE -- Discuss your concern with a member
of dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that
level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the
sales, service orparts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership
or the
general manager.
8-2
STEP TWO -- If after contacting amember of
In the U.S. Virgin Islands: 1-800-496-9994
dealership management, it appears
your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center by calling 1-800-222-1020.In Canada,
contact GM of Canada Customer Communication
Centre in Oshawaby calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
In the Dominican Republic: 1-800-75 1-4135
(English) or 1-800-751-4136 (Spanish)
For help outside of the United States and Canada, call
the following numbers as appropriate:
0
In Mexico: (525) 625-3256
0
In Puerto Rico: 1-800-496-9992 (English) or
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
0
In the Bahamas: 1-800-389-0009
In Bermuda, Barbados, Antigua and the British
Virgin Islands: 1-800-534-0122
In all other Caribbean countries: (809) 763-13 15
In other overseas locations, call GM Overseas
Distribution Corporation in Canada at:
(905) 644-4 112.
8-3
For prompt assistance, please have thefollowing
information available to give theCustomer
Assistance Representative:
0
0
0
0
Your name, address, home and business
telephone numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available
from the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at
the top left of the instrument panel and visible
through thewindshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
Nature of concern
We encourage you to call us so we can give your inquiry
prompt attention. However, if you wish to write
Chevrolet, address your inquiry to:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
In Canada, write to:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer CommunicationCentre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H8P7
8-4
Refer to your Warranty and Owner
Assistance
Information bookletfor addresses of
GM Overseas offices.
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolvedin the dealership,
using the dealer’s facilities, equipment and personnel.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
Customer Assistancefor Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers whoare deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer
Assistance Center. AnyTTY user can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV. (TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance Program
Roadside Assistance is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year, by calling 1-800-CHEV-USA
(1 -800-243-8872). This toll-free number willprovide
you over-the-phone roadside assistance with minor
mechanical problems. If your problemcannot be
resolved over the phone, our advisorshave access to a
nationwide network of dealer recommended service
providers. Roadside membership is free, however some
services may incur costs.
Roadside offers twolevels of service to the customer,
Basic Care and Courtesy" Care:
Toll-freenumber,1-800-CHEV-USA
Free towing for warranty repairs
Basic over-the-phone technical advice
Available dealer services at reasonable costs (i.e.,
wrecker services, locksmithkey service, glass
repair, etc.)
To enhance Chevrolet's strong commitment to customer
satisfaction, Chevrolet is excited to announce the
establishment of the Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
Center. Asthe owner of a 1998 Chevrolet, membership
in Roadside Assistance is free.
ROADSIDE Courtesy TM Care PROVIDES:
0
Roadside Basic Care services (as outlined previously)
Plus:
FREE Non-Warranty Towing (to the closest dealer
from a legal roadway)
FREE LocksmitWKey Service (when keys are lost
on the road or locked inside)
0
FREE Flat Tire Service (spare installed on the road)
FREE Jump Start (at home or on theroad)
FREE Fuel Delivery ($5 of fuel delivered on
the road)
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers
needing warranty service. Courtesy Transportation will
be offered in conjunction with
the coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to eligible purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger car
and light duty trucks. (Please see your selling dealer
for details.)
Note: Courtesy Care is available to retail and retaillease
customers operating 1998 and newer Chevroletvehicles
for a period of 3 years/36,000 miles (60 000 km),
whichever occurs first. All Courtesy Care services must
be pre-arranged by Chevrolet Roadside or dealer
Service Management.
Basic Care and Courtesy Care are not partof or
included in the coverage providedby the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Chevroletreserves the right to
modify or discontinue Basic Care and Courtesy Cure
at any time.
For complete program details, see your Chevrolet dealer
to obtain a Roadside Assistance Center brochure.
The Roadside Assistance Center uses companies that
will provide you with quality and priority service. When
roadside services are required, our advisors will explain
any payment obligations that may be incurred for
utilizing outside services.
For prompt assistance when calling, please have the
following available to give to the advisor:
0
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
0
License plate number
0
Vehicle color
0
Vehicle location
0
Telephone number where you can
be reached
0
Vehicle mileage
0
Description of problem
Please refer to the Roadside Assistance brochure
inside your owner information portfolio for full
program details.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased inCanada have an extensive
Roadside Assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
separate brochure provided by the dealer or call
1-800-268-6800 for emergency services.
8-7
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet offers Courtesy Transportationfor customers
needing warranty service. CourtesyTransportation will
be offeredin conjunction withthe coverage provided by
the Bumper to Bumper New Vehicle Limited Warranty
to retail purchasers of 1998 Chevrolet passenger cars
and light duty trucks (please see your selling dealer
for details).
Courtesy Transportationincludes:
0 One way shuttle ride for any warranty repair
completed duringthe same day.
0
0
0
Up to $30 maximum daily vehicle rental allowance
for any overnight warranty repair up to five days,
OR
Up to $30 maximum daily cab, bus or other
transportation allowance in lieuof rental for any
overnight warranty repair up tofive days, OR
Up to $10 daily fuel allowance for rides provided by
another person (i.e., friend, neighbor, etc.)in lieu of
rental for any overnight warranty repairup to five days.
Note: All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administeredby your Chevrolet dealer
service management. Claim amounts should
reflect all actualcosts.
8-8
Chevrolet Courtesy Transportationis not part of the
Bumper to BumperNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reservesthe right to make any changes or
discontinue Courtesy Transportation at anytime
without notification.
For additional program details, contact your
Chevrolet dealer.
Some state insurance regulations make it impractical to
rent vehiclesto people under21 years of age. If you are
under 21 and havedifficulty renting a vehicle, Chevrolet
will reimburseup to $30/day for documented
transportation youreceive.
For warranty repairs duringthe Complete Vehicle
Coverage period in the New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
interim transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program.Please consult your
dealer for details. The Roadside Assistance program is
available only in the UnitedStates and Canada.
0
In Canada,please consult your GM dealer for
information on Courtesy Transportation.
GM Participation in an Alternative
Dispute Resolution Program
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Canadian owners refer to your Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP). General Motors reserves the right to
change eligibility limitations and/or to discontinue its
participation in this program.
Both Chevrolet and your Chevrolet dealer are committed
to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new
vehicle. Our experience has shown that,if a situation
arises where you feel your concern has not been
adequately addressed, the Customer Satisfaction Procedure
described earlier in this section is very successful.
There may be instances where an impartial third party
can assist in arriving at a solution to a disagreement
regarding vehicle repairs or interpretation of the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. To assist in resolving these
disagreements, Chevrolet voluntarily participates in
BBB AUTO LINE.
BBB AUTOLINE is an out-of-court program
administered by the Better Business Bureau system to
settle automotive disputes. This program is available
free of charge to customers who currently own or lease a
GM vehicle.
If you are not satisfied after following the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure, you may contact the BBB using
the toll-free telephone number, or write them at the
following address:
BBB AUTO LINE
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203- 1 804
Telephone: 1-800-955-5 100
To file a claim, you will be askedto provide your name
and address, your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and a statement of the nature of your complaint.
Eligibility is limited by vehicle age and mileage, and
other factors.
8-9
We prefer you utilize the CustomerSatisfaction
Procedure before you resort to AUTOLINE, but you
may contact the BBB at any time. The BBB will attempt
to resolve the complaint serving as an intermediary.If
this mediation is unsuccessful, an informal hearing will
be scheduled whereeligible customers may presenttheir
case to an impartial third-party arbitrator.
The arbitrator will make a decision which you may
accept or reject. If you accept the decision, GM will be
bound by that decision. The entire dispute resolution
procedure shouldordinarily take about 40 days fromthe
time you file a claim until a decision is made.
Some state laws may require you to use this program
before filing a claim with a state-run arbitration program
or inthe courts. For further information, contact the
BBB at 1-800-955-5100 or the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020.
Warranty Information
Your vehicle comes witha separate warranty booklet
that contains detailed warrantyinformation.
8-10
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO THE UNITED STATES
GOVERNMENT
If you believe that your vehicle hasa defect which could
cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should
immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), inaddition to
notifying General Motors.
If NHTSA receivessimilar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved
in individual problems betweenyou, your dealeror
General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inthe
Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS TO
THE CANADIAN GOVERNMENT
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
Transport Canada
Box 8880
Ottawa, Ontario KlG 3J2
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
TO GENERAL MOTORS
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify
us. Please call us at 1-800-222-1020 or write:
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motorsof Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L l H 8P7
Ordering Service and Owner
Publications in Canada
Service manuals, owner’s manuals andother service
literature are available for purchase for all current and
past model General Motors vehicles.
The toll-free telephone number for ordering information
in Canada is 1-800-668-5539.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 7047
Troy, MI 48007-7047
8-11
1998 CHEVROLET SERVICE PUBLICATIONS ORDERING INFORMATION
The following publications covering
the operation and servicingof your vehicle can be purchased by filling
out
the Service Publication Order Form in this book and mailing
it in withyour check, money order,
or credit card information to Helm, Incorporated (address below.)
-~
CURRENT PUBLICATIONS FOR1998 CHEVROLET
SERVICE MANUALS
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information
on engines, transmission, axle, suspension, brakes,
electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $90.00
OWNER’S INFORMATION
Owner publications are writtendirectly for Owners and
intended to provide basic operational information about the
vehicle. The owner’s manual will include the Maintenance
Schedule for all models.
TRANSMISSION, TRANSAXLE, TRANSFER CASE
UNIT REPAIR MANUAL
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments and specifications for the
1998 GM transmissions, transaxles and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $40.00
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $15.00
SERVICE BULLETINS
Service Bulletins give technical service informationneeded
to knowledgeably service General Motorscars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions to assist in the
diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.
PLEASE COMPLETETHE ORDER FORM SHOWN ON
THE FOLLOWING PAGE AND MAILTO:
Helm, Incorporated EO. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:$10.00
CURRENT & PAST MODEL ORDER FORMS
Service Publications areavailable for current and past
model GM vehicles. To request an order form, please
specify year and model name of the vehicle.
OR ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:OO PM EasternTime
For Credit Card Orders Only(VlSA-MasterCard-air)
I
ORDER TOLL FREE
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holders Only)
1-800-782-4356
-
(Monday-Friday 8:OO AM 6:OO PM EST)
FAX Orders Onlv 1-313-865-5927
Orders will be mailed within days
10 of receipt. Please allow ade uate time for postal
service. If further information is needed, write to the addresssghown below or call
slip with return
1-800-782-4356. Material cannot be returned for credit without,packing
information within 30 daysof delivery. On returns, a re-stocklng feemay be applied
against the oriQinal order.
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, and also the Check or Money
name ofthe person to whose attention the shipment should be sent.
Order payableto
Mail completed order form to:
Helm, Inc. (USA funds
HELM, INCORPORATED P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207
only do not sendcash.)
For purchases outsideU.S.A. please writeto the above address for quotation.
p
A
I
p
-
0
0
MasterCard
VISA
(CUSTOMER'S
(ATTENTION)
NAME)
II
I
T
Q
E
N
(STREET ADDRESS-NO P.O. BOX NUMBERS)
(cm
DAYTIME
TELEPHONE
NO.
(ZIP CODE)
(STATE)
0
AREA CODE
SIGNATURE
GM-CHE-ORD98 *(Prices are subject
to change without notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.)
~ccount
Number:
Expiration
mofyr: Date
'I
m
lm
lm
here
Check
if your billing :address
is different from your shipping
address shown.
CUSTOMER
Note to Canadian Customers:All listed prices arequoted in U S . funds. Canadian residents
are to make checks payablein US. funds. To cover Canadian postage, add$115 0 plus the
U S . order processing.
I
&
8-14
NOTES
0 Section 9
Index
Accessory Plug ...............................
2-58
Adding Equipment to the Outsideof Your Vehicle . . . . . . 6-3
AirBag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-20
How Does it Restrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
How it Works ................................
1-22
1-22
Location ....................................
1-21, 2-76
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-25
Servicing ...................................
What Makes it Inflate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-23
What Will You See After it Inflates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
1-23
When Should it Inflate .........................
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 18
3-3
AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aircontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Alarm
Arming the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Content Theft-Deterrent .......................
2- 15
Disarming the System .........................
2- 17
Turning Off the Alarm .........................
2-17
2-9
AlarmPanicMode ...............................
Alignment and Balance, Tire ......................
6-50
6-58
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Anti-Lock ..................................... 4-7
Brake System Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78, 4-7
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Anti.Theft. Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
System Warning Light .....................
2.79.4.9
Audio Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
3-6
Audio Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
Auto-Down Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-32
Automatic Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-30
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-34
BTSICheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
2-30
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Park Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-35
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Starting Your Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-27
2-43
Axle, Limited-Slip Rear .........................
Axle,Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
9-1
Battery ......................................
6-37
Jump Starting .................................
5-3
Replacement. Keyless Entry ....................
2- 11
5.3.5.4.6.37
Warnings ...........................
8-9
BBB Auto Line .................................
4-21
Before Leaving on a Long Trip....................
Better Business Bureau Mediation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
4-27
Blizzard ......................................
Brake
6-36
Adjustment ..................................
6-34
Checking Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid .......................................
6-33
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-33
2-37
Parking .....................................
Pedal Travel .................................
6-36
Replacing System Parts ........................
6-36
System Warning Light .........................
2-77
4-34
Trailer ......................................
Transmission Shift Interlock ....................
2-43
6-35
Wear .......................................
Brakes. Anti-Lock ...............................
4-7
4-6
Braking ........................................
Braking in Emergencies ..........................
4- 10
Break-In.NewVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-52
2-43
BTSI .........................................
BTSICheck ...................................
7-34
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-37
9-2
Canadian Roadside Assistance ....................
8-7
Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
CarbonMonoxide . . . . . . . . . . 2.12.2.41.2.42.4.28.4.33
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Cassette Deck Service ...........................
7-32
2-56
Cassette Storage ................................
3.73.. 9
Cassette Tape Player .........................
Cassette Tape Player Care ........................
3-24
CD Player Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp Bulb Replacement . . . . 6-39
Certification Label ..............................
4-29
4-34
Chains.Safety .................................
6-51
Chains. Tire ...................................
Changing a Flat Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
2-85
Check Gages Light ..............................
Checking Your Restraint Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Chemical Paint Spotting..........................
6-60
ChildRestraints ................................
1-33
Securing in a Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Securing in the Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
TopStrap ...................................
1-38
WheretoPut ................................
1-37
CigaretteLighter ...............................
2-57
Circuit Breakers and Fuses .......................
6-63
Cleaner. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Cleaning
Aluminurnwheels ............................
6-58
Convertible Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Fabric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-56
6-53
Inside of Your Vehicle .........................
InstrumentPanel .............................
6-55
6-55
Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-57
Outside of Your Vehicle ........................
6-56
Removable Roof Panel .........................
Special Problems .............................
6-54
6-54
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-54
Vinyl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-58
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
3-6
Clock. Setting the . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-56
Close-Out Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-25
Clutch. Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
Comfort Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3- 14
Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Care of Your Compact Disc .....................
3-25
Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Player Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3- 17. 3-20
2-56
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Careofyour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
5-38
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Content Theft-Deterrent .........................
2- 15
Alarm/Panic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-9
Feature Customization .........................
2- 19
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-5
2-65
ConvertibleTop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55
Convex Outside Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-21
Bleed Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater,Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
5-17
RecoveryTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
CoolingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-16
2-52
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-8
CruiseControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-47
2-50
Ending Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Increasing Speed While Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Reducing Speed While Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
2-49
Resuming a Set Speed .........................
2-48
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UsingonHills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-49
Customer Assistance for Text Telephone Users. . . . . . . . . 8-4
Customer Assistance Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ....................
8-2
6-59
Damage. Finish ...............................
Damage. Sheet Metal ............................ 6-59
2-51
Daytime Running Lamps .........................
DeadBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-3
Defects.ReportingSafety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
DefensiveDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Defogger.RearWindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Defogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-5
Delayed Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-53
9-3
Dimensions. Vehicle ............................
6-7 1
8
.......................
Dolby
Reduction
B Noise
3-13
Door
Last Door Closed Locking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-6
LockoutPrevention ............................
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Downshifting ..................................
2-36
Drive Position. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Driver Position .................................
1- 12
Driver’s Door Alarm Delay/Shock Sensor Enable . . . . . 2-23
Driving
4-19
City . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Defensive ....................................
4-2
4-2
Drunken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-20
Freeway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
InaBlizzard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-27
In Foreign Countries ...........................
6-5
4-17
IntheRain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Night . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
OnCurves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
On Grades While Towing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
4-23
On Hill and Mountain Roads....................
OnSnowandIce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
4-19
Throughwater ...............................
WetRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-17
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
4-34
With a Trailer ................................
4-2
DrunkenDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-4
Electrical Equipment. Adding . . . . . . . . . . 2.28.3.23.6.62
6-62
Electrical System ...............................
6-10’6-11
Engine ..................................
Coolant .....................................
6-26
Coolant Heater ...............................
2-28
7-32
Coolant Level Check ..........................
Coolant Temperature Gage .....................
2-80
2-41
Exhaust .....................................
FuseBlocks .................................
6-64
Identification ................................
6-62
OilLevelCheck .............................. 7-32
5-14
Overheating .................................
2-42
Running While Parked .........................
6-69
Specifications ................................
Starting Your . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Engineoil ....................................
6-12
Adding .....................................
6-13
Additives ...................................
6-17
6-13
Checking ...................................
Pressure Gage ................................
2-83
Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
What Kind to Use .............................
6-14
6-17
Whentochange ..............................
Ethanol ........................................
6-5
Exhaust’Engine ................................
2-41
2-20. 2-53
Exit Lighting .............................
Fabric Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-53
6-54
FabricProtection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fancontrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-2
2- 19
Feature Customization ...........................
Driver’s Door Alarm Delay/Shock Sensor Enable ... 2-23
Exit Lightingmelayed Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Keyless Entry Verification ......................
2-21
Last Door Closed LockingLockout Prevention . . . . . 2-21
Theft-Deterrent Arming Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Theft-Deterrent Arming Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Fifth Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34.2.35
6-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container....................
FillingYourTank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Filter. Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6- 19
6- 17
Filter. Engine Oil ...............................
Finish Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
6-59
Finish Damage .................................
First Gear. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33
First Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34.2.35
Fixed Antenna Mast Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Flashers. Hazard Warning
.........................
5-2
FranGais
en
Flat Tire. Changing .............................
5-27
2-59
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids and Lubricants ............................
7-37
FogLamps .................................... 2-51
1-6
Folding Rear Seatback ............................
Foreign Countries. Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Fourth Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.34.2.35
Four-WayManualSeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-3
..
French LanguageManual ...........................
11
FrontConsole ..................................
2-56
5-9
FrontTowing ...................................
Front Turn Signal Bulb Replacement
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Fuel ..........................................
6-3
Filling Your Tank ..............................
6-6
2-85
Gage .......................................
6-5
InForeignCountries ...........................
Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Gages
Engine Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Engine Oil Pressure ...........................
2-83
Fuel ....................................... 2-85
GAWR .......................................
4-29
Gear Positions. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Gear Positions. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 2-34. 2-35
2-55
GloveBox ....................................
4-29
Gross Axle Weight Rating ........................
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................
4-29..
Guide
................................. 11
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
2-12
Hatch ........................................
Hatch Release ..................................
2-12
Hatch Release. Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Hazard Warning Flashers ..........................
5-2
9-5
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
6-38
Bulb Replacement ............................
High/Low Beamchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
OnReminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
Hearing Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Heating ........................................ 3-4
High-Beam Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
4-33
Hitches. Trailer .................................
Hood
Checking Things Under . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Hydraulic Clutch System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33
Hydroplaning ..................................
4- 18
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25
Inflation. Tire .................................. 6-44
Inside Daymight Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54
Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Brakesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-36
ExhaustSystems .............................
7-36
RearAxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Steering ....................................
7-36
Suspension ..................................
7-36
9-6
Throttle System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
InstrumentPanel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-72
Brightness Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Interior Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
Jack. Tire ....................................
5-29
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
K e y Lock Cylinders Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
2-26
Key Release Button .............................
2-7
Keyless Entry ...................................
2-21
Keyless Entry Verification ........................
2-2
Keys ..........................................
Labels
Certification .................................
4-29
Service Parts Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-62
Tire-Loading Information ......................
4-28
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
2-50
Lamps ........................................
Courtesy ....................................
2-52
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
OnReminder ................................ 2-50
Last Door Closed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6. 2-21
Last Door Closed Locking Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Latches. Front Seatback ...........................
1-5
Leaving Your Vehicle .............................
2-6
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine Running . . . . . . . 2-40
Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Lights
Air Bag Readiness .......................
1.21. 2.76
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.78.4.7
ASR System Warning .....................
2.79.4.9
2-77
Brake System Warning .........................
2-85
CheckGages ................................
2-52
Interior .....................................
Low Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
2-84
LowOil ....................................
Low Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.79.4.9
Safety Belt Reminder ......................
1.7. 2.76
Service Engine Soon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Limited-Slip Differential. Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
4-28
Loading YourVehicle ...........................
2-6
Lockout Prevention ..............................
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Cylinders ...................................
7-33
Door ........................................
2-4
Ignition Transmission Lock Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35
Key Lock Cylinder Service .....................
7-33
PowerDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
4-14
Loss Of Control ................................
Low Coolant Light ..............................
2-80
LowOilLight .................................
2-84
2.79.4.9
Low Traction Light .........................
Lubricants and Fluids ............................
7-37
Lubrication Service. Body ........................
7-33
M a i n Fuse Block ..............................
6-64
MaintenanceRecord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-39
Maintenance. Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71
Maintenance Schedule ............................ 7-1
Long TripMighway Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7-6
Long Tripmighway Intervals .....................
7-32
Owner Checks and Services.....................
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Scheduled Maintenance Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Short Trip/City Definition .......................
7-5
7-5
Short Trip/City Intervals ........................
6-60
Maintenance. Underbody .........................
Maintenance When Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81
Manual Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2
2-55
ManualMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55
Manual Remote Control Mirror ....................
2-34
Manual Transmission ............................
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-24
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
2-27
Starting Your Engine ..........................
Methanol .......................................
6-5
2-54
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Convex Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-55
2-54
Inside Daymight Rearview .....................
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
2-55
Manual Remote Control ........................
9-7
Mirrors (Continued)
Power Remote Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
MountainRoads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Multifunction Lever .............................
2-45
Neutral. Automatic Transmission ................. 2-3 1
I1
2.34.2.35
Neutral. Manual Transmission ................
New Vehicle “Break-In” .........................
2-24
4-16
Night Vision ...................................
2-75
Odometer ....................................
Odometer. Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75
4- 12
Off-Road Recovery .............................
Oil. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Overdrive. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Overheating Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
Owner Checks and Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Owner Publications. Ordering .....................
8- 12
P a i n t Spotting. Chemical ........................
6-60
Park
AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Parking
AtNight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Brake ......................................
2-37
Brake Mechanism Check ....................... 7-35
2-14
Lots .......................................
Over Things That Burn ........................
2-41
With a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36
Parking Your Vehicle, Manual Transmission ...........2-43
Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20,1-26
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
PASS-Key 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Periodic Maintenance Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-36
Power
DoorLocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
OptionFuses ................................
6-63
Remote Control Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
4-10
Steering ....................................
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Windows ...................................
2-44
2-54
Power, Retained Accessory .......................
Pregnancy, Use of Safety Belts .................... 1-19
Problems on the Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Publications, Service and Owner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20.5.23
Radiator Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
3-23
Radio Reception ................................
Radios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7.3.9.3.14
Rain. Driving In ................................
4-17
RAP .........................................
2-54
ReadingLamps ................................ 2-53
Rear
Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26
Lamp Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Seat Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Sidemarker Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 1
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Window Defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rearview Mirror. Inside Daymight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Reclining Front Seatbacks .........................
1-4
Recovery Tank. Coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Refrigerants. Air conditioning .....................
6-7 1
Remote
2- 13
Hatch Release ................................
Replacement
Bulbs ......................................
6-69
Parts .......................................
6-71
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Replacing Safety Belts ...........................
1-46
Reporting Safety Defects .........................
8-10
Restraints
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Replacing Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
Systemcheck ................................
7-33
Types of Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33
Retained Accessory Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Reverse. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3 1
Reverse. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34. 2-35
Right Front Passenger Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Roadside Assistance ..............................
8-5
Rocking YourVehicle ...........................
5-39
Roof Panels. Twin Lift-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59
Rotation.Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
Safety Belt Extender ............................
1-46
SafetyBelts ....................................
1-6
Adults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-55
Children ....................................
1-30
Driver Position ...............................
1 .12
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46
How to Wear Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12
IncorrectUsage ....................
1-15. 1-44. 1-45
Lap-Shoulder ...........................
1.12.1.26
LargerChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-43
Questions and Answers ........................
1.11
Rear Seat Positions............................
1-26
ReminderLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7. 2.76
Replacing After a Crash. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-46
Right Front Passenger Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Smaller Children and Babies ....................
1-30
Use During Pregnancy .........................
1.19
WhyTheyWork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Safety Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Safety Warnings and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Scheduled Maintenance Services ....................
7-4
Seatback
Folding Rear ..................................
1-6
Front Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
RecliningFront ...............................
1-4
Seats
1-3
Four-WayManual .............................
ManualFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1-3
Power .......................................
Restraint Systems ..............................
1- 1
Seatcontrols .................................
1-2
Securing a Child Restraint ......................
1-39
Second Gear. Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Second Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34. 2-35
2-33
Second-Gearstart ..............................
Service ........................................
6-2
Bulletins. Ordering ............................
8- 12
2-81
Engine Soon Light ............................
8- 12
Manuals. Ordering ............................
Parts Identification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
8- 12
Publications. Ordering .........................
Work. Doing Your Own .........................
6-2
6-1
Service and Appearance Care ......................
Service and Owner Publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 12
Service Publications .............................
8- 12
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Sheet Metal Damage ............................
6-59
2-30
ShiftLever ....................................
Shift Speeds ...................................
2-36
Shifting
AutomaticTransmission .......................
2-30
Into Park (P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
2-34. 2-35
Manual Transmission .....................
OutofPark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-43
9-10
SignalingTurns ................................
2-45
Sixth Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
4-14
Skidding ......................................
2-36
Skip Shift Light ................................
Sound Equipment. Adding ........................
3-23
5-38
Spare Tire. Compact .............................
Specifications and Capacities......................
6-69
Specifications. Engine ...........................
6-69
Speech Impaired. Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Speedometer ...................................
2-75
Stains. Cleaning ................................
6-54
Standard Differential. Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
7-34
Starter Switch Check ............................
2-27
Starting Your Engine ............................
Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Steering ......................................
4-10
In Emergencies ...............................
4-11
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10
Wheel. Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-44
2-55
Storage Compartments ...........................
Storage. Vehicle ................................
6-37
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
Stuck: In Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
Sunvisors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-58
Sunshades. T-Top ...............................
2-63
...
vlll
Symbols.Vehicle ................................
Synchronization .................................
2-9
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-75
3-24
TapePlayerCare ...............................
TemperatureControl .............................
3-2
Theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
; 2-15
Theft-Deterrent ...............................
2-22
ArmingMethod ..............................
2-22
Arming Verification ...........................
CDPlayer ...................................
3-21
THEFTLOCK" ................................
3-21
Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Third Gear. Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34'2-35
2-44
Tilt Steering Wheel .............................
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5 1
TireLoading ...................................
4-28
Tire-Loading Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
6-43
Tires .........................................
6-50
Alignment and Balance ........................
6-47
BuyingNew .................................
6-51
Chains .....................................
ChangingaFlat ..............................
5-27
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-59
5-38
Compact Spare ...............................
Inflation ....................................
6-44
Inflation Check ...............................
7-32
Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
Loading ....................................
4-28
Pressure ....................................
6-44
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Traction ....................................
6-49
6-49
Treadwear ...................................
Uniform Quality Grading .......................
6-48
WearIndicators ..............................
6-47
Wheel Replacement ...........................
6-50
When It's Time for New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
TopStrap .....................................
1-38
Torque Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Torque. Wheel Nut .........................
5-35. 6-69
Towing a Trailer ................................
4-30
5-7
Towing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer
4-35
Backingup .................................
4-34
Brakes .....................................
4-36
Driving on Grades ............................
Driving With a ...............................
4-34
FollowingDistance ...........................
4-34
4-33
Hitches .....................................
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4-37
Maintenance When Towing .....................
4-36
Parking on Hills ..............................
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-35
4-34
Safety Chains ................................
Tongueweight ...............................
4-32
Total Weight on Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Turnsignals .................................
4-35
4-32
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
4-37
onaHill ...................................
Automatic ...................................
6-20
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
9-11
Transmitters. Keyless Entry ........................
2-7
Transmitters. Matching .......................... 2- 10
Transmitters. Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-9
Transmitters. Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Transportation. Courtesy .......................... 8- 8
Trip Odometer ................................. 2-75
T-Top Sunshades ............................... 2-63
'ITYUsers ..................................... 8-4
Turn Signal and Lane Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Turn SignaUMultifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
Twin Lift-off Roof Panels ........................
2-59
7-35
Underbody Flushing Service .....................
Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-60
Underhood Electrical Center ......................
6-66
Vehicle
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5
Damagewarnings ..............................
vii
Dimensions .................................
6-71
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Loading ....................................
4-28
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Vehicle and Content Theft-DeterrentfAlarm System.... 2-10
Ventilation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
VisorVanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Visors, Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
9-12
w a r n i n g Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3
Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ............... 2-75
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Washer Fluid. Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47. 6-31
Washing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Weatherstrips ..................................
6-56
Wheel
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
5-35. 6-69
Nut Torque .............................
Replacement .................................
6-50
5-29
Wrench .....................................
Windows .....................................
2-43
2-44
Auto-Down .................................
Power ......................................
2-44
WindshieldWasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Fluid ..................................
2-47. 6-31
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
6-42
BladeReplacement ...........................
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Winter Driving .................................
4-24
Wiring.Headlamp ..............................
6-63
WreckerTowing .................................
5-7
Wrench. Wheel .................................
5-29
High Beam
J
__. ,
V6
K
p
s
'
"2
,3 quarts (11.6 I
,..
i
i
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement